Furuno GD-1700C Operator's Manual

Back
COLOR VIDEO PLOTTER GD-1700C
COLOR VIDEO PLOTTER GD-1710C
VIDEO PLOTTER
GD-1700
Your Local Agent/Dealer
9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya, Japan
Telephone :
0798-65-2111
fax
0798-65-4200
:
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan
FIRST EDITION : APR. 2001
H
PUB.No. OME-44090
( HIMA ) GD-1700/1700C/1710C
: APR. 09,2004
*00080918402*
*00080918402*
*00080918402*
*OME44090H00*
*OME44090H00*
*OME44090H00*
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
CAUTION
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
No one navigation device should ever be
solely replied upon for the navigation of
a vessel.
Do not open the equipment.
Only qualified personnel
should work inside the
equipment.
Always confirm position against all available
aids to navigation, for safety of vessel and
crew.
Do not disassemble or modify the
equipment.
A warning label is attached to the equipment. Do not remove the label. If the
label is missing or damaged, contact
a FURUNO agent or dealer about
replacement.
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can
result.
Immediately turn off the power at the
switchboard if the equipment is emitting
smoke or fire.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, do not
remove cover. No user-serviceable
parts inside.
Continued use of the equipment can cause
fire or electrical shock. Contact a FURUNO
agent for service.
Name: Warning Label (1)
Type: 86-003-1011-0
Code No.: 100-236-230
Keep heater away from equipment.
A heater can melt the equipment's power
cord, which can cause fire or electrical
shock.
NOTICE
The brilliance of the LCD is adjustable
to match a wide variety of lighting
conditions. However, its maximum
setting may not be sufficiently bright
to permit viewing of the display with
polarized sunglasses.
Use the proper fuse.
Fuse rating is shown on the power cable.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage
to the equipment.
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD ............................................................................................................... viii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS........................................................................................ x
WHAT IS WAAS? ......................................................................................................... xii
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW..................................................................................1-1
1.1 Operating Controls ......................................................................................................................1-2
1.1.1
Display unit controls .......................................................................................................1-2
1.1.2
Remote controller ...........................................................................................................1-5
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card .................................................................................................................1-6
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off ...............................................................................................................1-7
1.4 Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Contrast, Hue......................................................................1-8
1.4.1
Display brilliance, panel brilliance...................................................................................1-8
1.4.2
Contrast ..........................................................................................................................1-9
1.4.3
Hue (GD-1700C/1710C) .................................................................................................1-9
1.5 Selecting a Display....................................................................................................................1-10
1.5.1
Display modes ..............................................................................................................1-10
1.5.2
Selecting a display........................................................................................................1-11
1.5.3
Switching control in combination and overlay screens.................................................1-12
1.5.4
Selecting image source ................................................................................................1-13
1.6 Cursor Pad, Cursor ...................................................................................................................1-14
1.7 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as Destination ..............................................................1-15
1.8 Data Boxes ................................................................................................................................1-16
1.8.1
Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key.....................................................................1-16
1.8.2
Rearranging data boxes ...............................................................................................1-16
1.8.3
Temporarily erasing a data box ....................................................................................1-16
1.9 Function Keys............................................................................................................................1-17
1.9.1
Executing a function .....................................................................................................1-17
1.10 Simulation Display.....................................................................................................................1-18
2. PLOTTER OPERATION .........................................................................................2-1
2.1 Plotter Displays ...........................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1
Full-screen plotter display...............................................................................................2-1
2.1.2
Compass display ............................................................................................................2-3
2.1.3
Highway display..............................................................................................................2-5
2.1.4
Nav data display .............................................................................................................2-6
2.2 Presentation Mode ......................................................................................................................2-7
2.2.1
North-up..........................................................................................................................2-7
2.2.2
Course-up .......................................................................................................................2-8
2.2.3
Auto course-up ...............................................................................................................2-8
2.3 Shifting the Display......................................................................................................................2-9
2.4 Chart Scale..................................................................................................................................2-9
2.5 Chart Cards ...............................................................................................................................2-10
2.5.1
Chart card overview......................................................................................................2-10
2.5.2
Indices and chart enlargement .....................................................................................2-11
ii
TM
2.5.3
FURUNO and NavCharts
2.5.4
C-MAP charts ...............................................................................................................2-14
charts ...............................................................................2-12
2.6 Working with Track ....................................................................................................................2-18
2.6.1
Displaying track ............................................................................................................2-18
2.6.2
Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship track..............................................................2-19
2.6.3
Changing track color (GD-1700C/1710C) ....................................................................2-20
2.6.4
Track plotting method and interval for own ship track ..................................................2-21
2.6.5
Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting.......................................................2-22
2.6.6
Erasing track.................................................................................................................2-23
2.7 Marks, Lines ..............................................................................................................................2-25
2.7.1
Entering a mark, line.....................................................................................................2-25
2.7.2
Changing mark attributes .............................................................................................2-25
2.7.3
Selecting line type ........................................................................................................2-26
2.7.4
Erasing marks, lines .....................................................................................................2-27
2.8 Waypoints..................................................................................................................................2-29
2.8.1
Entering waypoints .......................................................................................................2-29
2.8.2
Editing waypoint data ...................................................................................................2-32
2.8.3
Erasing waypoints ........................................................................................................2-34
2.8.4
Changing waypoint mark size (FURUNO, NavCharts ) .............................................2-35
2.8.5
Searching waypoints ....................................................................................................2-36
TM
2.9 Routes .......................................................................................................................................2-37
2.9.1
Creating routes .............................................................................................................2-37
2.9.2
Connecting routes ........................................................................................................2-41
2.9.3
Inserting waypoints in a route.......................................................................................2-42
2.9.4
Removing waypoints from a route................................................................................2-44
2.9.5
Erasing routes ..............................................................................................................2-44
2.10 Navigation .................................................................................................................................2-45
2.10.1 Navigating to a "quick point".........................................................................................2-45
2.10.2 Navigating to waypoints................................................................................................2-46
2.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services (NavCharts
TM
only)..................................................2-47
2.10.4 Following a route ..........................................................................................................2-49
2.10.5 Cancelling route navigation ..........................................................................................2-52
2.11 Alarms .......................................................................................................................................2-53
2.11.1 Audio alarm on/off ........................................................................................................2-53
2.11.2 Arrival alarm .................................................................................................................2-54
2.11.3 Anchor watch alarm......................................................................................................2-55
2.11.4 XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm.....................................................................................2-56
2.11.5 Speed alarm .................................................................................................................2-56
2.11.6 Proximity alarm.............................................................................................................2-57
2.11.7 Trip alarm......................................................................................................................2-58
2.11.8 Alarm information .........................................................................................................2-59
2.12 Resetting Trip Distance .............................................................................................................2-60
3. RADAR OPERATION ............................................................................................ 3-1
3.1 Radar Display..............................................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Transmitting, Stand-by ................................................................................................................3-2
3.3 Tuning .........................................................................................................................................3-2
3.4 Adjusting the Gain.......................................................................................................................3-2
iii
3.5 Reducing Sea Clutter ..................................................................................................................3-4
3.5.1
How the A/C SEA works .................................................................................................3-4
3.5.2
Adjusting A/C SEA ..........................................................................................................3-4
3.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter.....................................................................................................3-5
3.6.1
Adjusting the A/C RAIN ..................................................................................................3-5
3.6.2
Adjusting the FTC ...........................................................................................................3-6
3.7 Range Scale ................................................................................................................................3-7
3.8 Pulselength..................................................................................................................................3-8
3.9 Presentation Mode ......................................................................................................................3-9
3.9.1
Selecting a presentation mode .......................................................................................3-9
3.9.2
Description of presentation modes ...............................................................................3-10
3.10 Measuring the Range ................................................................................................................3-12
3.10.1 Measuring range by range rings...................................................................................3-12
3.10.2 Measuring range by cursor...........................................................................................3-13
3.10.3 Measuring range by VRM.............................................................................................3-14
3.10.4 Erasing a VRM, VRM indication ...................................................................................3-15
3.10.5 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes ......................................................................................3-15
3.10.6 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes ........................................................................................3-15
3.10.7 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes.......................................................................................3-15
3.11 Measuring the Bearing ..............................................................................................................3-15
3.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor ........................................................................................3-15
3.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL ...........................................................................................3-15
3.11.3 Erasing an EBL, EBL indication....................................................................................3-16
3.11.4 Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes ......................................................................................3-16
3.11.5 Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes ........................................................................................3-16
3.11.6 Moving EBL/VRM data boxes.......................................................................................3-16
3.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker...................................................................................3-17
3.13 Reducing Noise .........................................................................................................................3-17
3.14 Reducing Radar Interference ....................................................................................................3-18
3.15 Zoom .........................................................................................................................................3-19
3.15.1 Zooming in on radar targets..........................................................................................3-19
3.15.2 Zooming in on ARP, TTM targets..................................................................................3-19
3.16 Shifting the Picture ....................................................................................................................3-20
3.16.1 Manual shift ..................................................................................................................3-20
3.16.2 Automatic shift ..............................................................................................................3-21
3.17 Using the Offset EBL.................................................................................................................3-22
3.17.1 Predicting collision course ............................................................................................3-22
3.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between two targets .........................................................3-23
3.18 Echo Trails.................................................................................................................................3-24
3.18.1 Trail time .......................................................................................................................3-24
3.18.2 Starting echo trails ........................................................................................................3-25
3.18.3 Trail brilliance (GD-1700)..............................................................................................3-25
3.18.4 Trail gradation (GD-1700C/1710C) ..............................................................................3-25
3.18.5 Trail color (GD-1700C/1710C)......................................................................................3-26
3.19 Echo Stretch ..............................................................................................................................3-27
3.20 Echo Averaging .........................................................................................................................3-28
3.21 Outputting TLL Data ..................................................................................................................3-29
iv
3.22 Guard Alarm ..............................................................................................................................3-30
3.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone ..........................................................................................3-30
3.22.2 When the alarm is violated… .......................................................................................3-31
3.22.3 Cancelling the guard alarm ..........................................................................................3-31
3.23 Watchman .................................................................................................................................3-32
3.23.1 How watchman works...................................................................................................3-32
3.23.2 Turning on/off watchman ..............................................................................................3-32
3.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval .............................................................................3-32
3.24 Waypoint Marker .......................................................................................................................3-33
3.25 ARP, TTM Operation .................................................................................................................3-34
3.25.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM.................................................................................3-35
3.25.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP) ...........................................................................3-36
3.25.3 Displaying target number (ARP, TTM)..........................................................................3-37
3.25.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets .............................................................................3-38
3.25.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP).....................................................................................3-39
3.25.6 Displaying past position display (ARP).........................................................................3-40
3.25.7 ARP, TTM target data ...................................................................................................3-41
3.25.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP) ...............................................................................................3-42
3.25.9 Lost target alarm (ARP)................................................................................................3-43
3.26 Interpreting the Radar Display ..................................................................................................3-44
3.26.1 General .........................................................................................................................3-44
3.26.2 False echoes ................................................................................................................3-46
3.26.3 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)....................................................................3-48
3.26.4 Racon (Radar Beacon).................................................................................................3-50
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION ........................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Principle of Operation..................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Sounder Displays ........................................................................................................................4-2
4.2.1
Selecting a sounder display ...........................................................................................4-2
4.2.2
Description of sounder displays .....................................................................................4-3
4.2.3
Selecting screen split method in combination displays ..................................................4-7
4.3 Automatic Sounder Operation.....................................................................................................4-8
4.3.1
How the automatic sounder works .................................................................................4-8
4.3.2
Types of automatic sounder modes ...............................................................................4-8
4.3.3
How to enable automatic sounder operation..................................................................4-8
4.4 Manual Sounder Operation .........................................................................................................4-9
4.4.1
Selecting the manual mode............................................................................................4-9
4.4.2
Selecting display range ..................................................................................................4-9
4.4.3
Adjusting the gain ...........................................................................................................4-9
4.4.4
Range shifting...............................................................................................................4-10
4.5 Measuring Depth, Time ............................................................................................................. 4-11
4.6 Reducing Interference...............................................................................................................4-12
4.7 Reducing Low Level Noise........................................................................................................4-13
4.8 Erasing Weak Echoes ...............................................................................................................4-14
4.9 White Marker (GD-1700C/1710C) ............................................................................................4-15
4.10 Picture Advance Speed .............................................................................................................4-16
4.10.1 Advancement independent of ship's speed..................................................................4-16
4.10.2 Advancement synchronized with ship's speed.............................................................4-17
v
4.11 Display Colors (GD-1700C/1710C) ...........................................................................................4-18
4.12 Alarms .......................................................................................................................................4-19
4.12.1 Audio alarm on/off.........................................................................................................4-19
4.12.2 Bottom alarm ................................................................................................................4-20
4.12.3 Fish alarm .....................................................................................................................4-20
4.12.4 Fish alarm (B/L) ............................................................................................................4-21
4.12.5 Water temperature alarm..............................................................................................4-22
4.12.6 When an alarm setting is violated.................................................................................4-23
4.13 Water Temperature Graph.........................................................................................................4-24
4.14 Changing Pluse Repetition Rate ...............................................................................................4-24
4.15 Interpreting the Sounder Display...............................................................................................4-25
4.15.1 Zero line........................................................................................................................4-25
4.15.2 Bottom echo..................................................................................................................4-25
4.15.3 Fish school echoes .......................................................................................................4-26
4.15.4 Surface noise/Aeration .................................................................................................4-26
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT ..................................................................................5-1
5.1 General Setup .............................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 Plotter Setup................................................................................................................................5-4
5.2.1
Navigation options ..........................................................................................................5-4
5.2.2
Function key setup..........................................................................................................5-5
5.3 Chart Setup .................................................................................................................................5-7
5.3.1
Chart offset .....................................................................................................................5-7
5.3.2
FURUNO, NavCharts
5.3.3
C-MAP chart attributes .................................................................................................5-11
TM
chart attributes .........................................................................5-8
5.4 Data Boxes Setup .....................................................................................................................5-15
5.5 Hot Page Setup .........................................................................................................................5-16
5.6 Navigator Setup.........................................................................................................................5-17
5.6.1
Navigation data source .................................................................................................5-17
5.6.2
GPS receiver setup (Set equipped with GP-310B/320B) .............................................5-18
5.6.3
TD display setup ...........................................................................................................5-22
5.7 Nav Data Display Setup ............................................................................................................5-24
5.8 Radar Setup ..............................................................................................................................5-25
5.8.1
Radar display setup ......................................................................................................5-25
5.8.2
Function key setup........................................................................................................5-28
5.9 Sounder Setup ..........................................................................................................................5-30
5.9.1
System setup ................................................................................................................5-30
5.9.2
Sensor setup.................................................................................................................5-32
5.9.3
Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range ........................................................5-33
5.9.4
Function key setup........................................................................................................5-34
6. DATA TRANSFER ..................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Memory Card Operations ............................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1
Formatting memory cards...............................................................................................6-1
6.1.2
Saving data to a memory card........................................................................................6-2
6.1.3
Playing back data from a memory card ..........................................................................6-4
6.2 Uploading, Downloading Data.....................................................................................................6-5
6.2.1 Setting communication software on the PC....................................................................6-5
6.2.2 Uploading or downloading data ......................................................................................6-5
vi
6.3 Loading Waypoint Data from Yeoman..................................................................................... 6-8
6.4 Receiving Data Via Network Equipment.................................................................................. 6-9
6.5 Outputting Data Through the Network................................................................................... 6-10
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING............................................................... 7-1
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
Preventive Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 7-1
Replacement of Fuse ............................................................................................................. 7-2
Replacement of Batteries ....................................................................................................... 7-2
Simple Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................... 7-3
7.4.1 General...................................................................................................................... 7-3
7.4.2 Plotter ........................................................................................................................ 7-3
7.4.3 Radar......................................................................................................................... 7-4
7.4.4 Sounder ..................................................................................................................... 7-5
Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................ 7-6
7.5.1 Memory I/O test ......................................................................................................... 7-6
7.5.2 Test pattern ................................................................................................................ 7-9
7.5.3 Keyboard, remote controller test............................................................................... 7-10
GPS Status Display.............................................................................................................. 7-11
Clearing Memories ............................................................................................................... 7-12
Error Messages.................................................................................................................... 7-13
APPENDIX ..................................................................................................................A-1
Menu Overview............................................................................................................................ A-1
Geodetic Chart List ...................................................................................................................... A-9
World Time Chart ........................................................................................................................A-10
Icons ........................................................................................................................................A-11
SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................................................... SP-1
INDEX...................................................................................................................Index-1
vii
FOREWORD
A Word to the Owner of the GD-1700/1710 Series
Video Plotter
FURUNO Electric Company thanks you for purchasing the GD-1700/1710 Series Video
Plotter. We are confident you will discover why the FURUNO name has become
synonymous with quality and reliability.
For over 50 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for
quality and reliability throughout the world. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our
extensive global network of agents and dealers.
Your plotter is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine
environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless properly
installed and maintained. Please carefully read and follow the operation and maintenance
procedures set forth in this manual.
We would appreciate feedback from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our
purposes.
Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.
The example screens shown in this manual may not match the screens you see on your
display. The screen you see depends on your system configuration and equipment settings.
viii
Features
The 1700 series work within our new product-network system called the “NavNet.” Each
product has an IP address to communicate with NavNet compatible products within the
network, using TCP/IP protocol through an Ethernet 10BASE-T network.
The main features are as follows:
• Three models are available:
GD-1700: Monochrome LCD
GD-1700C: Color LCD
GD-1710C: High-precision color LCD
• Bright 7” screen visible even under direct sunlight.
• User-friendly operation with combination of discrete keys, soft keys and cursor pad.
• Accepts FURUNO and NavCharts™ (NAVIONICS) charts, or C-MAP NT/NT+ charts
(C-MAP), depending on specification.
All names mentioned are registered trademarks of their respective companies.
• Fast chart redraw.
• Built-in NavNet interface circuit board.
• 12-channel GPS Receiver GP-310B with highly accurate position fixing optionally
available, GP-320B with WAAS capability.
• User programmable function keys.
• Radar picture available with connection to NavNet compatible radar.
• Video sounder picture available with connection of the optional Network Sounder
ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N.
• Optional memory card interface unit CU-200.
ix
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
All NavNet products incorporate a “network circuit board” to integrate each NavNet product
on board through an optional LAN cable (Ethernet 10BASE-T). Each NavNet product is
assigned an IP address to enable transfer of images between other NavNet products. For
example, video plotter pictures can be transferred to a radar and vice versa. Pictures
received via the NavNet may be adjusted at the receiving end.
The number of display units which may be installed depends on the number of
network sounder connected. For a system incorporating three or more products,
a “hub” is required to process data.
For one network sounder: one radar and three plotters, or four plotters
For two network sounder: one radar and two plotters, or four plotters
NavNet system
Antenna Unit
(ex. MODEL 1722/1722C/1723C)
GPS Receiver
GP-310B/320B
Echo sounder
Navigator
Display Unit
GD-1710C
GD-1700C
GD-1700
Echo sounder
External buzzer
PC
Memory card
interface unit CU-200
Remote
Controller
RMC-100
12 VDC
Other NavNet Unit
(Model 1722, etc.)
: Option
: Standard
Rectifier
PR-62
Network Sounder
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
12-24 VDC
NavNet system
x
100/110/115/220/230 VAC,
1φ, 50/60 Hz
Two-unit NavNet system
Radar Antenna Unit
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B
PLOTTER
Radar data
Plotter data
Two-unit NavNet system
Three-or-more-unit NavNet system (Max. 4 NavNet capable display units)
GP-310B/320B
Antenna Unit
Radar data
Plotter data
HUB
Sounder data Note: The picture disappears
10 seconds after the NavNet
cable is disconnected from a
"sub" NavNet display unit.
Network Sounder
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
(option)
Network Sounder
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
(option)
Three-or-more-unit NavNet system
xi
WHAT IS WAAS?
WAAS, available in North America, is a provider in the worldwide SBAS (Satellite
Based Augmentation System) navigation system. SBAS provides GPS signal
corrections to SBAS users, for even better position accuracy, typically better
than three meters. Two more SBAS providers are also currently under
development, MSAS (Multi-Functional Satellite Augmentation System) for Japan
and EGNOS (Euro Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service) for Europe. All
providers will be compatible with one another, thus providing “seamless” position
fixes to SBAS users. The illustration below shows the coverage area. (Accuracy
may be affected when using a GEO satellite not within your current location.)
150°W
120°W
90°W
60°W
30°W
0
30°E
60°E
90°E
120°E
150°E
60°N
60°N
40°N
EGNOS
MSAS
40°N
20°N
20°N
122
0
120
134
131
0
WAAS
20°S
20°S
40°S
40°S
60°S
60°S
150°W
120°W
Satellite, Region
120, AOR-E
122, AOR-W
131, IOR
134, POR
90°W
60°W
30°W
0
30°E
60°E
90°E
120°E
150°E
Initial operation time
Position
15.5°W
54°W
64.5°E
178°E
WAAS: 2003
EGNOS: 2004
MSAS: 2005
At the time of this software release, SBAS is still under development (Providers
are expected to have initial operations capability from the times shown above.)
During this developmental period, which may last for several years, there is no
guarantee of the accuracy, integrity, continuity, or availability of the SBAS signal.
Furuno will accept no responsibility for the use of the signal for other than the
above stated purpose. It is the user's responsibility to exercise common
prudence and navigational judgment while using the SBAS signal. Users are
reminded that the SBAS has not been commissioned for use in safety of life
applications (SOLAS) and must be turned to the "OFF" position on any SOLAS
vessels.
xii
1.
OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
This chapter provides basic information needed to get you started using your
plotter. The following topics are presented:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Control overview
Chart card insertion
Power on/off
Contrast, brilliance and hue (GD-1700C/1710C only) adjustments
Display selection
MOB (Man OverBoard) mark entry
Data boxes
Function keys
Simulation display
1-1
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.1
Operating Controls
1.1.1
Display unit controls
Overview of display unit controls
The plotter, radar, sounder and chart systems are mainly operated with controls
of the display unit (and remote controller). Ten keys are labeled and they provide
the function shown on their labels. The five soft keys provide various functions
according to current operating mode. The [ENTER] knob mainly functions to
register selections on the menu and enter alphanumeric data. The cursor pad’s
main function is to move the cursor across the screen. When you correctly
execute an operation, the unit generates a beep. Invalid operation causes the
unit to emit three beeps.
Selects display mode.
Momentary press:
Registers own ship’s
position as a waypoint.
Press three seconds:
Marks man overboard
position.
Soft keys
Shows or hides the soft
keys, function keys,
nav data alternately.
Cursor pad
Selects menu items and options;
shifts cursor. Press, release and
press again to change setting
consecutively.
Opens/closes the alarm menu.
Clears data; erases selected mark.
Opens/closes the main menu.
Selects a range.
ENTER knob
Push: Registers options on menus.
Rotate: Selects character; adjusts sensitivity
(sounder, radar); chooses menu items and options.
Displays the soft keys for EBL/VRM.
Radar: Displays the soft keys for adjustment of
gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and FTC (Model 1700
series radar only).
Sounder: Adjusts gain.
Long press: Turns power off.
Momentary press: Turns power on;
opens the display for adjustment of brilliance,
etc.; displays RADAR STBY/TX soft key.
Chart slot
Control panel
1-2
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
Soft keys
The function of the five soft keys changes according to the operation. Their
labels for their current functions are shown on the screen to the left of the keys.
To hide or show the soft key labels, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key. Each press of
the key shows preset soft keys, user function keys or turns off navigation
information (at the top of the screen).
SOFT
KEYS
Display unit
Some soft keys show the current state of the soft key function in reverse video
as shown below.
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
Current option
shown in reverse video
WPT 002 FISH
D.BOX
ON/OFF
BRIDGE
Plotter display
1-3
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
[ENTER] knob
The [ENTER] knob functions to
• Register data
• Enter alphanumeric data such as waypoint name
• Select menu items and options
• Adjust setting
For data input, clockwise rotation of the knob selects an alphabet, symbol or
numeric, in one of the sequences shown below. After you have selected desired
alphanumeric character push the [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
[ENTER] knob
ENTER knob
Alphabet, symbol, numeric
A!B!C!D!E!F!G!H!I!J!K!L!M!N!O!P!Q!R!S!T!U!V!W
!X!Y!Z!&!_!’ !#!0!1!2!3!4!5!6!7!8!9
Numerics
0!1!2!3!4!5!6!7!8!9
Cursor pad
The cursor pad’s main function is to shift the cursor. For details see, paragraph
1.6.
1-4
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.1.2
Remote controller
SAVE
RANGE
MOB
DISP
ABC
1
DEF
2
GHI
3
JKL
4
MNO
5
PQR
6
STU
7
VWX
8
YZ&
9
’# 0
EBL/VRM
WPT
Operating distance
90°: Up to 5 m
±45°: Up to 3 m
Replace the batteries (AA) when the
distance from which the display
unit can be operated shortens.
Note: The remote controller may
become damaged if dropped.
Mishandling of the remote
controller is not covered by
the warranty.
GAIN
CENTER
MARK
ENT
CNTL
ENT
MENU
CLEAR
BRILL
SK1
TONE
SK2
TX/STBY
ACQ
ALARM
HIDE/SHOW
SK3
SK4
SK5
Remote controller
Key
RANGE
DISP
SAVE MOB
Ten keys
EBL/VRM
GAIN
WPT
MARK ENT
CENTER
CNTL
Function
Same as RANGE key on
display unit.
Same as DISP key on
display unit.
Same as SAVE MOB key on
display unit.
Enter alphanumerics.
Same as EBL/VRM key on
display unit.
Same as GAIN key on
display unit.
Displays “alphabet” WPT list
on plotter display.
Same as MARK ENTRY soft
key.
Returns own ship to screen
center on plotter display.
Switches control between
displays on combination
displays.
Key
ENT
CLEAR
MENU
BRILL
TONE
TX/STBY
ACQ
ALARM
HIDE/SHOW
SK1 – SK5
(soft keys)
Function
Same as ENTER knob on
display unit.
Same as CLEAR key on
display unit.
Same as MENU key on
display unit.
Adjusts display brilliance.
Adjusts display contrast
(color model only).
Toggles radar between
standby and transmit.
Acquires radar target.
(Requires radar source
equipped with ARP.)
Same as ALARM key on the
display unit.
Same as HIDE/SHOW key
on display unit.
Same as soft keys on display
unit.
1-5
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.2
Inserting a Chart Card
Your unit reads FURUNO and NavCharts™ (NAVIONICS) chart cards, or
C-MAP chart cards, depending on the type of display unit you have. Insert the
appropriate chart card for your area as follows:
1. Open the chart card slot lid.
Chart slot
Display unit
Card drive
Memory card interface unit
(option)
2. Insert desired chart card groove side up.
3. Close the lid to protect the chart drive.
Note 1: Do not remove a card while the chart is being drawn. This may cause
the equipment to freeze.
Note 2: Do not insert or remove a card while the power is on. This may cause
the equipment to freeze.
Note 3: For multiple display units, do not use the same chart card type in more
than one display unit.
Note 4: A card remover is supplied to ease removal of chart cards. Attach the
card remover to the right-hand side hole on the card and pull to remove
card. You can leave the card remover attached to the card while the
card is in the card slot - push the card remover leftward until it contacts
the recessed area in the card.
Chart card and card remover
1-6
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.3
Turning the Unit On/Off
Press the [POWER/BRILL] key to turn the unit on. A beep sounds and the
equipment proceeds in the sequence shown below, displaying the production
information screen, startup test results and the chart usage disclaimer. The
startup test checks the ROM, RAM, internal battery and backup data for proper
operation, displaying the results for each as OK or NG (No Good). If NG appears
an appropriate message appears on the screen. For any NG, try to press any
key to go to the chart disclaimer screen, then perform the diagnostic test
referring to the paragraph “7.5 Diagnostics.”
Chart List
Host Name
GD-1700C
C-MAP: 03591720XX
NAVIONICS: 03591730XX
STARTUP TEST
è
ROM
RAM
BACKUP DATA
INTERNAL BATTERY
LICENSE NO.
Product information
XX= Program Version No.
* = Name determined at installation.
GD-1700(C) PLOTTER
STATION NAME:
PLOTTER*
FURUNO ELECTRIC CO., LTD.
CHARTS AVAILABLE
GD-1700
GD-1710C
C-MAP: 03591700XX
C-MAP: 03591960XX
NAVIONICS: 03591970XX NAVIONICS: 03591710XX
OK
OK
OK
OK
è
NO NATIONAL HYDROGRAPHIC
OFFICE HAS VERIFIED THE
INFORMATION IN THIS
COASTLINE DATA CARD AND NONE
ACCEPT LIABILITY FOR THE
ACCURACY OF REPRODUCTION OR
ANY MODIFICATIONS MADE
THEREAFTER. THIS PRODUCT WITH
THIS COASTLINE DATA CARD
DOES NOT REPLACE THE
REQUIREMENT TO USE THE
APPROPRIATE PRODUCTS FOR
NAVIGATION ACCORDING TO
NATIONAL AND INTERNATIONAL
REGULATIONS.
PROGRAM No. (See above)
Startup test
Chart disclaimer
Startup sequence
You may press any key at the chart disclaimer screen to show the last-used
display, or wait several seconds to let the equipment do it for you. For start up
with the radar display, the magnetron takes from one minute to two minutes
and thirty seconds (depending or radar model) to warm up before the radar can
be operated. The time remaining for warm up of the magnetron is counted down
at the center of the display.
To turn the unit off, press and hold down the [POWER/BRILL] key until the
display goes dark (about 3 sec.). To protect the LCD attach the hard cover. Note
that the network sounder is turned off approx. three minutes after turning off the
power.
Note: The first time you turn on the power (or any time the power is applied after
a memory reset), you are asked if you want to start the simulation mode,
which provides simulated operation of the equipment. Push the [ENTER]
knob to start the simulation mode, or press the [CLEAR] key to start
normal operation. For details about the simulation mode, see the
paragraph “1.10 Simulation Display.”
1-7
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.4
Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Contrast,
Hue
You can adjust display brilliance, panel brilliance, contrast and hue
(GD-1700C/1710C only) as shown below.
1.4.1
Display brilliance, panel brilliance
1. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily. A set of soft keys for adjustment
of brilliance, contrast and hue (GD-1700C/1710C only) appear.
Current selection is highlighted.
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
BRILL
TRIP N
99.9 nm
CONTST
359.9°M
19.9 kt
DISPLY
BRILL
16.0nm
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M
19.9 kt
BRILL
TRIP
99.9 nm
CONTST
DISPLY
BRILL
16.0nm
PANEL
BRILL
PANEL
BRILL
CONTST
/HUE
CONTST
RADAR
STBY
RADAR
STBY
RETURN
RETURN
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE
8
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE
8
GD-1700C/1710C
GD-1700
Brilliance adjustment soft keys
2. Press the DISPLY BRILL or PANEL BRILL soft key as appropriate. An
adjustment window appears at the bottom of the screen. This window shows
the name of the item selected for adjustment plus current brilliance level, by
bar graph.
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE
8
Display brilliance
PANEL BRILLIANCE
8
Panel brilliance
Display brilliance and panel brilliance windows
3. Adjust the [ENTER] knob, clockwise to raise the setting or counterclockwise
to decrease it. You may also use the soft key pressed at step 2. Eight levels
of display brilliance and panel brilliance are available.
4. Hit the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: If the equipment is turned off with minimum brilliance the screen will be
dark at the next power up. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key consecutively to
adjust the brilliance.
1-8
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.4.2
Contrast
1. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily.
2. Press the CONTST (GD-1700) or CONTST/HUE (GD-1700C/1710C) soft
key.
3. For the GD-1700C/1710C, two soft keys appear at the pressing of the
CONTST/HUE soft key: CONTST and HUE. Press the CONTST soft key to
adjust the contrast.
CONTRAST
8
Contrast window
4. Adjust the [ENTER] knob, clockwise to raise the setting or counterclockwise
to decrease it. You may also use the CONTST soft key. 16 levels (GD-1700)
and 10 levels (GD-1700C/1710C) of contrast are available.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
1.4.3
Hue (GD-1700C/1710C)
You may select the colors for the radar, plotter and overlay displays as below.
1. Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily.
2. Press the CONTST/HUE (GD-1700C) or HUE (GD-1710C) soft key.
3. Press the HUE soft key to show the hue setting window.
HUE
▲
¡ DAY
¡ NIGHT
¡ TWILIGHT
¤ MANUAL SET
▼
Hue window
4. Operate the cursor pad to select hue desired, referring to the table below.
MANUAL SET follows the color settings on the CHART DETAILS menu for
the plotter and RADAR DISPLAY SETUP for the radar.
Characters
Radar ring
Radar echo
Background
Landmass (plotter)
Night
Red
Red
Orange
Black
Light-Yellow
Day
Black
Green*
Red
White
Yellow
Twilight
Green
Green*
Yellow
Blue
Dim Yellow
* = Red on C-MAP display unit.
5. Hit the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: When using the overlay screen (color model only), the own ship track will
be hidden if the radar background and own ship track are blue and the
“MANUAL SET” hue setting is used. In this case, set HUE to other position
and then return to “MANUAL” to show the own ship track in black.
1-9
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5
Selecting a Display
1.5.1
Display modes
If you have a network radar, navigator and network sounder connected, four
full-screen displays are available: plotter, radar, video sounder and navigation
data. (The GD-1700C/1710C has five screens, those mentioned above plus the
overlay screen.) In addition to the full-screen display, you can divide the screen
into half-screen combination displays to show two sets of images (data).
Full screen
(Ex. plotter)
Combination screen
(Ex. plotter + sounder)
Overlay screen
(Radar and plotter,
color model only)
Display screens
The table below shows the displays available with each screen type.
Screen type and available display screen
Full screen
Plotter, radar,
sounder, nav data
1-10
Combination screen options
Plotter, radar, sounder, compass,
highway, compass/highway, nav
data, overlay
Overlay screen options
(GD-1700C/1710C only)
Radar + plotter
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5.2
Selecting a display
1. Press the [DISP] key to show the full-screen selection window. The icons of
modes not available are marked with an “X.”. PAGE1-PAGE5 are
user-arrangeable displays called “hot pages,” which you can configure as you
like. For further details, see the paragraph “5.5 Hot Page Setup.”
RADAR
PLOT
SNDR
NAV
OVRLY*
Basic display
screens
* = Color model only
Hot pages
PAGE1
PAGE2
PAGE3
PAGE4
PAGE5
· TURN KNOB TO SELECT MODE
AND PUSH KNOB TO ENTER.
· PUSH ANY SOFT KEY TO
SELECT IMAGE SOURCE.
Full-screen selection window
2. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select a basic display screen or a hot page
screen.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob. If you selected a basic display screen, a set of
appropriate combination display screens appear. In the example below, radar
combination displays are shown.
PUSH ENTER KNOB.
Radar combination screen selection window
4. Operate the [ENTER] knob to select the combination screen display desired,
then push it to set.
1-11
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5.3
Switching control in combination and overlay screens
A soft key is provided in relevant combination and overlay screens
(GD-1700C/1710C only) to switch control between displays. In the example
below, the RADAR CNTRL and PLOTTR CNTRL soft keys enable switching
control between the radar and plotter screens in the plotter/radar combination
display.
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M
TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
16.0nm
16.0nm
SIGNAL
PROC.
RADAR
DISPLY
WP-002
359.9°M
TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
CNTL
RADAR
RADAR
CNTRL
MARK
ENTRY
To adjust
plot
MODE
NTH UP
WP-002
FISH
NAV
FUNC
3nm
LP
12/
FISH
NAV
POS
3nm
LP
12/
H-UP
H-UP
TARGET
PLOTTR
CNTRL
ST-BY
RADAR
CNTRL
359.9° R
11.70nm
+
Radar display selected
ST-BY
PLOTTR
CCNTRL
To adjust
radar
359.9° R
11.70nm
+
Plotter display selected
How to switch control between modes in the plotter/radar combination display
1-12
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.5.4
Selecting image source
When more than one network radar or network sounder is connected to the
equipment, you may select an image source for each as shown below. This is
not necessary when only one network radar or network sounder is connected.
1. Press the [DISP] key.
2. Press any soft key to show the following display.
▲
SELECT
SOURCE
RADAR SOURCE
RADAR - - SOUNDER SOURCE
SOUNDER IP ADDRESS
172. 031. 014. 001
EDIT
HOST NAME
PLOTTER -
IF THERE IS MORE THAN
ONE NETWORK RADAR OR
ECHO SOUNDER, YOU MAY
SELECT THE IMAGE
SOURCES FOR DISPLAY.
RETURN
Select source menu
3. Use the cursor pad to select RADAR SOURCE or SOUNDER SOURCE as
appropriate, then press the EDIT key.
RADAR SOURCE
SOUNDER SOURCE
RADAR - - -
SOUNDER-
Radar source
Sounder source
Radar source and sounder source windows
4. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter source name: ◄ or ► to
select position and rotate the [ENTER] knob to select character.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob.
6. Press the [DISP] key to finish.
7. Turn the power off and on again.
Note: Source names are determined at installation. For example, the source
names for radars in a two radar system might be “RADAR” and
“RADAR1”.
1-13
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.6
Cursor Pad, Cursor
The cursor pad functions to shift the cursor, for measurement of latitude and
longitude position and range and bearing to a location. Press the cursor pad to
turn the cursor on, and the cursor appears at the own ship’s position. Operate
the cursor pad to shift the cursor. The cursor moves in the direction of the arrow
or diagonal pressed on the cursor pad.
Cursor position and range and bearing from own ship to the cursor are displayed
at the top of the screen when the cursor is on.
Cursor data
L/L position,
Range and
bearing from
own ship to
cursor
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
272.4°M
15.9 nm
16.0nm
TRIP NU
99.9 nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
CENTER
Cursor
GOTO
CURSOR
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
Cursor, cursor data
1-14
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.7
Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as
Destination
The MOB (Man Overboard) mark functions to mark man overboard position. You
can inscribe this mark from any mode, except while playing back data or
conducting any test. Note that this function requires position data.
MOB
mark
M
(MOB)
Range, bearing
Current
position
Man
overboad
M 162.5°M
O
B 0.49 nm
MOB Data Box
Bearing and range
to MOB position
MOB concept
1. Press and hold down the [SAVE/MOB] key immediately for about three
seconds when someone falls onboard. The display shows the waypoint
number being saved (youngest empty waypoint number, 001-999) followed
by the MOB confirmation window.
Time remaining is counted down while the [SAVE/MOB] key is pressed.
WAYPOINT SAVED!
XXXWPT
CONTINUE PUSHING
FOR MOB!
XXX = Waypoint number
CONTINUE PUSHING
FOR KNOB!
XX SEC
MAN OVER BOARD!
GO TO MOB?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
XX = Time remaining is couted down.
MOB mark messages
2. Push the [ENTER] knob to select the MOB position as the destination, or
press the [CLEAR] key to only mark current ship’s position as a waypoint. If
you select the MOB position as the destination;
• A full-screen radar, plotter or overlay (color model only) appears depending
on the display in use.
• The MOB mark “MOB” appears at the MOB position and a line (light-blue
on the GD-1700C/1710C) runs between it and current position. This line
shows the shortest course to the MOB position.
• Range and bearing to the MOB position are shown in the MOB data box.
To erase an MOB mark from the plotter display, you must first erase its
corresponding waypoint. Place the cursor on the MOB mark, then press the
[CLEAR] key followed by pushing the [ENTER] knob to erase the waypoint. Then,
repeat to erase the MOB mark.
1-15
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.8
Data Boxes
Data boxes, providing navigation data, may be shown on any full-screen display.
Up to six data boxes (two in case of large characters) may be shown, and the
default data boxes are position (in latitude and longitude), course over ground,
speed over ground and trip log. The user may choose which data to display,
where to locate it, and show or hide it as desired. In addition, data boxes may be
set independently for each display mode (plotter, radar, sounder). For how to
select data for the data boxes, see the paragraph “5.4 Data Boxes Setup”.
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M
TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
002WP
FISH
D.BOX
ON /OFF
BRIDGE
TRIP LOG
4.58nm
POSITION
47°
58.535'N
122°
36.496'W
COG
SOG
323.6°M
20.0
kt
Data boxes
Plotter display, showing data boxes
1.8.1
Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key
Plotter: D. BOX ON/OFF
Radar: ZOOM & D. BOX → D. BOX ON/OFF (EBL/VRM data box, cursor data
box also shown/hidden)
Sounder: AUTO/D. BOX→D. BOX ON/OFF
1.8.2
Rearranging data boxes
You may select the location for data boxes as follows:
1. Using the cursor pad, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move.
As the cursor enters the box it changes to a hand. Push the [ENTER] knob,
and the hand changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
2. Use the cursor pad to move the data box to the location desired, then push
the [ENTER] knob.
1.8.3
Temporarily erasing a data box
You may temporarily erase a data box. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor
inside the data box you wish to erase, then press the [CLEAR] key. To redisplay
the box, press the D.BOX soft key twice to display it.
1-16
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.9
Function Keys
The function keys provide for one-touch execution of a desired function. The
default function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function
Key
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
1.9.1
Default Setting, Key Label
Radar
Plotter
Echosounder
Heading line on/off, HL Track on/off, TRK
TLL output, TLL
Rings on/off, RNG
Edit mark/line, EML
Clutter, CLT
Echo trail, TRL
Ruler, RUL
Signal level, SLV
Offcenter, OFC
Add new waypoint,
Noise limiter, NL
ADD
STBY/TX, TX
Waypoint
Picture advance, PA
alphanumeric list, ALP
Executing a function
1. Press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to replace the preset soft key labels with the
function key labels.
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M
TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
16.0nm
FISH
BRIDGE
TARGET
T
R
K
H
L
E
M
L
R
N
G
R
U
L
002WP
319.9°M
T
R
L
Function
keys
A
D
D
O
F
C
A
L
p
T
X
Function
keys
359.9°R
0.24nm
+
Plotter
Radar
Function keys
2. Press function key desired.
Note: Function keys can be individually programmed for the plotter, radar and
sounder displays. For further details, details see the following:
Plotter: paragraph 5.2.2
Radar: paragraph 5.8.2
Sounder: paragraph 5.9.4
1-17
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
1.10
Simulation Display
The simulation display, which is for use by service technicians for demonstration
purposes, provides simulated operation to help acquaint you with the many
features your unit has to offer. It allows you to view and control a simulated
plotter, radar and sounder picture, without position-fixing equipment, network
radar or a network sounder. Most controls are operative, thus you may practice
setting destination, enter waypoints, etc.
The “SIM” icon ( I M ) appears when any simulation mode is active.
S
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP and SIMULATION
SETUP soft keys in order.
RADAR
LIVE
PLOTTER
LIVE
SOUNDER
LIVE
SPEED
00.0kt
COURSE
000.0°
LATITUDE
45°35.000’N
LONGITUDE
125°00.000’W
START DATE & TIME
00:00 01.APR.00
RADAR SIMULATION DATA
NO
SIM
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
Simulation setup menu
3. Follow appropriate procedure on the next several pages.
Radar
The radar simulation mode is not available with the GD-1700 series.
1-18
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
Plotter
1. Select PLOTTER, then press the EDIT soft key.
PLOTTER
▲
¡ SIMULATION
¤ LIVE
▼
2. Select SIMULATION, then press the [ENTER] knob.
3. Select SPEED, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Enter speed (setting range, 0-99 kt, default speed, 0 kt) with the
alphanumeric keys, then push the [ENTER] knob.
5. Select COURSE, then press the EDIT key.
6. Select “8 FIGURE” to trace the simulated ship’s track in a figure-eight course,
or enter your own course at DIRECTION. To enter course, use the cursor
pad to select digit, and enter value with the alphanumeric keys.
7. Press the ENTER soft key.
8. Select LATITUDE, then press the EDIT soft key.
9. Enter latitude (setting range, 85°N-85°S, default setting, 45°35.000’N), then
push the [ENTER] knob.
10. Select LONGITUDE, then press the EDIT soft key.
11. Enter longitude (setting range, 180°E-180°W, default setting, 125°00.000’W),
then push the [ENTER] knob.
12. Select START DATE & TIME, then press the EDIT soft key.
13. Enter start date and time, then push the [ENTER] knob.
14. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
1-19
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
Sounder
1. Select SOUNDER, then press the EDIT soft key.
SOUNDER
▲
¡ SIMULATION 1
¡ SIMULATION 2
¤ LIVE
▼
2. Select SIMULATION 1 (internally generated echoes) or SIMULATION 2
(network sounder-generated echoes), then press the [ENTER] knob.
Note 1: If the network sounder could not be found “Sounder source is not
found. Cannot get simulation data.” appears. And if the sounder is
not active, the message “Sounder is not active. Cannot get
simulation data.” is displayed. Check that the sounder signal cable is
firmly fastened.
Note 2: The gain, shift, range and mode of the SIMULATION 1 mode picture
cannot be adjusted.
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
1-20
2.
PLOTTER OPERATION
2.1 Plotter Displays
You may show the plotter display over the entire screen, in the overlay screen
(GD-1700C/1710C), or in a combination screen.
2.1.1
Full-screen plotter display
Nav data window
(Data changes with NAV soft
key setting and cursor
status. For details see next page.)
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
Scale
M
TRIP NU
99.9 nm
MARK
ENTRY
16.0nm
SI
Icon (from left)
North Marker
Chart
Alarm
Track Hold
Chart Offset
Save
L/L Offset
Battery
Simulation
(See icon
table on
page A-11
for details.)
359.9°
19.9 kt
M
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
002WP
Functions for
soft keys
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
FISH
BRIDGE
Waypoint name
Own ship
marker
Course bar
Waypoint marker
Own ship
track
Full-screen plotter display
Note: When GPS signal error is found, the following occurs depending on the
device feeding position data:
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B: Alarm icon (
alarm sounds. Own ship marker blinks faster.
) appears and the aural
Other navigator: The message “NO GPS FIX” appears and is
accompanied by the aural alarm and alarm icon. If the GPS signal is
missing for more than 90 seconds, the message. “NO POSITION DATA”
appears.
2-1
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Nav data window
The data shown in the nav data window depends on the status of the NAV soft
key and the cursor.
Presentation
Mode
Latitude and longitude
of cursor intersection
Latitude, Longitude
Bearing to Cursor
34°24. 3456'N
+ 124°24.
3456'W
359. 9°M
59.9nm
Cursor Mark
NU
TRIP
99. 9nm
Trip Distance
Range to
Cursor
Presentation
Mode
Waypoint data
(waypoint selected
with cursor)
Waypoint Name
001WPT
Waypoint Mark
Own ship
position
NAV
POS
soft key
Bearing to Waypoint
359. 9°M 359. 9°M TRIP
NU
19. 9nm 19. 9kt 99. 9nm
Range to Waypoint
Latitude, Longitude
Course
Speed
Trip Distance
Presentation
Mode
Course
34°24. 3456'N
124°24. 3456'W
Own Ship Mark
359. 9°M TRIP
NU
19. 9kt 99. 9nm
Speed
Trip Distance
Time-to-Go
to Destination
Destination NAV
WPT
waypoint
data
soft key
Waypoint Name
Bearing to Waypoint
001WPT
Waypoint Mark
359. 9°M TTG4D02H23M NU
19. 9nm ETA1st 13:45
Range to Waypoint
Presentation
Mode
Estimated Time of
Arrival
Presentation
Mode
Own ship NAV
speed and S/C
course
soft key
Turns off NAV
nav data OFF
window soft key
Course, Speed
CSE 359. 9° M
SOG 19. 9kt
Bearing to Waypoint
BRG
RNG
359. 9 °M
99. 9nm
Range
to
Waypoint
TMP
DPT
79. 9°F
345 ft
Water Temp.*, * Requires appropriate
Depth*
sensor.
Contents of nav data window
2-2
NU
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.1.2
Compass display
The compass display, shown in combination displays, provides steering
information. The compass rose shows two triangles: the black triangle (hollow on
monochrome model) shows the bearing to destination waypoint and the red
(solid on the monochrome model) triangle, which moves with ship’s course,
shows own ship’s course.
The water temperature and depth graphs, which require appropriate sensors,
show the latest 10 minutes of water temperature and depth data. The range of
the depth graph is 50 feet and it is automatically adjusted with depth.
Destination
waypoint
Speed over ground
Range to destination waypoint
Speed through water
003WPT
Time-to-go
to destination
Destination
waypoint
bearing
(black on
color model)
Depth
graph*
TTG
RNG 9 9 . 9 n m
SOG 10.0kt STW 10.0 kt
0D 9H 59M
ETA
BRG
3 5 9 . 9 °M
DPT
45.2ft
0
TMP
1 6 . 2 °F
20
N
w
50
* = Requires appropriate
sensor.
Shown (in red
on color model)
when direction to
steer is "left."
Bearing scale
23th23:59
Ship's course
(red on color model)
E
CSE
3 5 9 . 9 °M
Estimated time of
arrival at destination
Water
temperature
graph*
10
Direction to steer
(green on color model)
Own ship marker
(For color model black when within
XTE range, yellow when over. Flashing
on monochrome model when over XTE range.)
XTE monitor
(See next page for
description.)
Compass display
2-3
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Reading the XTE (cross-track error) monitor
The XTE monitor, located below the compass rose, shows the distance you are
off course and the direction to steer to return to course. The own ship marker
moves according to direction and distance off course. It is shown in black when
the amount of cross-track error is within the XTE monitor range and yellow when
it is over. (On the monochrome model it flashes when the amount of cross-track
error is more than the XTE monitor range.) An arrow appears at the right or left
side of the XTE monitor and it shows the direction to steer to return to intended
course. (For the color model the arrow is shown in red when you should steer
left, and green when you should steer right.) In the example on the previous
page you would steer right to return to course. To maintain course, steer the
vessel so the own ship marker stays at the center of the XTE monitor.
Soft keys
EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure below
for how to set.
RESET XTE: Enables you to restart navigation, when a destination is set. Press
the EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the RESET XTE soft key. The following
message is displayed.
RESTART NAVGATION TO
CURRENT WAYPOINT.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Setting the range for the XTE monitor
1. With the compass (or highway) display shown, press the EDIT XT-LMT soft
key to display the following window.
XTE LIMIT
0 .1nm
XTE range setting window
2. Use the cursor pad to select digit to change. Note that all digits may be
cleared by pressing the [CLEAR] key.
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value, then push it to register setting, or
press the CANCEL soft key to cancel.
2-4
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.1.3
Highway display
The highway display, shown in combination displays, provides a graphic
presentation of ship’s track along intended course. It is useful for monitoring
ship’s progress toward a waypoint. The own ship marker shows relation between
ship and intended course. The XTE monitor shows the direction and amount
your vessel is off course – the arrow shows the direction to steer to return to
your course and the numeric the distance you are off course. Using the figure
below as an example, you would steer right 0.009 nm to return to course. To
maintain course, steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays aligned with the
intended course line.
Speed over ground, speed through water
Destination
waypoint
Range to
destination waypoint
RNG 9 9 . 9 n m
SOG 10.0kt STW 10.0 kt
0D 9H 59M
ETA 23th23:59
003WPT
Time-to-go
to destination
TTG
Estimated time of
arrival at destination
WPT001
Destination waypoint
Intended
course
Own ship marker
0.9 nm
0.009nm
0.9 nm
XTE range
Direction to steer (green on color model)
XTE monitor
Shown (in red on color model) when
direction to steer is "left."
Highway display
Soft keys
EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure on the
previous page for how to set.
RESET XTE: Enables you to restart navigation, when a destination is set. Press
the EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the RESET XTE soft key. See “Soft keys”
on the previous page for details.
2-5
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.1.4
Nav data display
The nav data display provides comprehensive navigation data, and it can be
shown in a two-screen combination display. The user may select what data to
display and where to display it. For details see the paragraph “5.7 Nav Data
Display Setup.”
Appropriate sensors are required. Bars ( - -) appear when corresponding sensor
is not connected.
Position
TRIP LOG
POSITION
34° 34. 5678' N
120° 34. 5678' W
WPT POSITION
34° 14. 5678' N
120° 14. 5678' W
SOG
STW
COURSE
10.0 kt
BEARING
9.2° M
DEPTH
10.0 kt
0 D 2 H 30 M
ETA
1st 1:25
DATE
2001
FEB 1
TIME
01:27:05
Half-screen display
RANGE
0.18 nm
18.2 °C
Water temperature
Depth
Bearing to
Range to
waypoint
waypoint
Course
Speed through
water
Speed over ground
Waypoint
Position
Full-screen display
Nav data displays
2-6
TTG
101.6° M
TEMP
1324.1 ft
103 nm
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.2
Presentation Mode
Three types of presentation modes are provided for the plotter display: north-up,
course-up and auto course-up. To change the presentation mode, first press the
[HIDE/SHOW] key if the plotter soft keys are not displayed. Press the MODE soft
key to select desired mode. Each press of the key changes the presentation
mode and presentation mode indication (top right-hand corner of the screen)
cyclically in the sequence of North-up, Course-up and Auto course-up.
2.2.1
North-up
North is at the top of the display and own ship is shown with a filled circle. This
mode is useful for long-range navigation.
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
D.BOX
ON/ OFF
WP-002
FISH
BRIDGE
Plotter display, north-up mode
2-7
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.2.2
Course-up
The course-up mode is useful for monitoring ship’s progress towards a waypoint.
The destination is at the top of the screen when a destination is set. When no
destination is set, the course or heading is at the top of the screen at the
moment the course-up mode is selected. A filled triangle marks own ship’s
position. The data sentences GGA and VTG must be output from the NavNet
display unit connected to the GPS navigator in order to correctly orient the own
ship marker in the course-up mode on other NavNet display units.
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
16.0nm
359.9°
19.9 kt
M
TRIP CU
99.9 nm
WPT 001
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
CSE UP
CENTER
GO TO
CURSOR
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
Plotter display, course-up mode, destination set
2.2.3
Auto course-up
The course is at the top of screen at the moment the auto course-up mode is
selected. In this mode, the current course is kept at the top of the screen within
22.5 degrees. For example, if your vessel turns more than 22.5 degrees to port
or starboard, the chart display will rotate so that your course is pointing towards
the top of the screen again.
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
16.0 nm
359.9°
19.9 kt
CU
99.9 nm
M TRIP
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
AT CU
CENTER
GOTO
CURSOR
D. BOX
ON/ OFF
Plotter display, auto course-up mode
2-8
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.3
Shifting the Display
The plotter display can be shifted as below.
1. Press the cursor pad to display the cursor.
2. Locate the cursor at a screen edge and press and hold down the cursor pad.
The screen shifts in the direction opposite of cursor location.
3. To turn off the cursor, press the CENTER soft key. This also returns the own
ship marker to the screen center.
2.4
Chart Scale
Chart scale (range) may be selected with the [RANGE -] or [RANGE +] key. The
[-] key expands the chart range; the [+] key shrinks it.
Charts scales
nm
km
sm
0.125
0.23
0.144
0.25
0.46
0.29
0.5
0.93
0.58
1
1.85
1.15
2
3.70
2.30
4
7.41
4.60
8
14.8
9.21
16
29.6
18.4
32
59.3
36.8
64
119
73.7
128
237
147
256
474
295
512
948
589
1024
1896
1178
2048
3792
2356
Note: When the display is expanded or shrunk beyond the range of the chart
card in use the message “NO CHART” appears, along with the appropriate
chart icon. See the illustration on the next page for details.
2-9
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.5
Chart Cards
2.5.1
Chart card overview
Your unit reads FURUNO and NavCharts™ (NAVIONICS) charts, or C-MAP
charts, depending on the type of display unit you have.
When you insert a suitable chart card in the slot and your boat is near any
cartographic object, a chart appears. If a wrong card is inserted or a wrong chart
scale is selected, landmasses will appear hollow. Chart icons appear at the top
of the display to help you select a suitable chart scale. The table below shows
the chart icons and their meanings.
Chart icons and their meanings
Icon
Meaning
Proper card is not inserted or
chart scale is too small.
Operate the RANGE key to
adjust chart scale.
Chart scale is too large.
Operate the RANGE key to
adjust chart scale.
Suitable chart scale is
selected.
2-10
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.5.2
Indices and chart enlargement
When the [RANGE] key is operated, you will see several frames appear on the
chart. These frames are called indices and they show you what parts of the chart
can be enlarged in the current range.
Sample chart (Japan) showing indices
When a chart cannot be displayed
A chart will not be displayed in the following conditions:
• When the chart scale is too large or too small.
• When scrolling the chart outside the indices.
When this happens, select proper chart scale.
Note: Indices can be turned on or off. For further details, see page 5-9 for
FURUNO and NAVIONICS charts and page 5-12 for C-MAP charts.
2-11
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.5.3
FURUNO and NavCharts™ charts
Chart symbols
The table below shows FURUNO and NavCharts™ chart symbols and their
meanings.
Chart symbols
Symbol
Symbol
Description
Description
Summit
Position of Sounding
Wreck
Obstruction
Lighthouse
Fishing Reef
Lighted Buoy
Platform
Buoy
Anchorage
Radio Station
Data for aids to navigation
Selected FURUNO and NavCharts™ charts can show buoy and lighthouse data.
Simply place the cursor on the lighthouse or buoy mark.
Place the cursor on
a lighthouse or buoy mark.
Lighthouse mark
Example of data displayed
Range and bearing
from own ship
Period (ex.: 6 seconds)
Visibility in nautical
mile (ex.: 12 miles)
NAVAID: /FL 6S 12M
FROM OS
52.38nm 48.0°
FL : Flashing
F
: Fixed light
F FL : Fixed and Flashing light
MO : Morse code light
Oc : Occulting light
Example of buoy, lighthouse data
2-12
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Port service icons (NavCharts™ only)
Selected NavCharts show services available at ports, with icons.
1. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor on the sailboat icon (denotes a port or
harbor) desired.
2. Push the [ENTER] knob.
3. Use ◄ or ► to select icon desired at the top of the display. The services
available appear directly below the icon selected.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Detailed information of service
selected
List of services
at the port selected
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
FIRST AID
Emergency
medical service
Fueling station
Water
supply station
Traveler's
service station
Customer
service station
Marine
equipment service
16.0nm
CANCEL
Sailboat icon (Port)
Information center
Port
Plotter display, showing port service display
Current (or tide) data
Some NavCharts provide for calculation of
the current (or tide) data for any date.
Additionally it displays the time of sunrise
and sunset, moon shape (on current data.)
1. Use the trackball to place the cursor on
a current icon ( ).
2. Press the [ENTER] knob to show the
current window.
3. Press the DATE soft key, and then enter
the date desired.
4. Press the ENTER soft key.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
+124
24. 3456 W 59.9kt
0.86
0.74
NU
Current
024nm
0.61
DATE
0.48
0.35
0
4 8 12 16 20 24
Time: 04:35
Speed (KT): 0.45ft
Angle ( ): 142
21/08/02 +00
Max. Time Speed Aug. Slack
KT
AT
Flood 4:58 1.2
323 7:58
Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15
Flood 17:15 1.1 145 15:15
Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15
Moonphase:
FULLY IN 1 DAY
Moonrise: 14:06
Moonset: 02:15
Sunrise: 05:03
Sunset: 19:10
RETURN
Current data display
2-13
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.5.4
C-MAP charts
Cursor and data display
Besides its fundamental functions of providing position data, the cursor can also
show information about caution area, depth area, source of data, etc. on C-MAP
charts. In addition, you can display information about an icon by placing the
cursor on it.
1. Press the cursor pad to turn the cursor on.
2. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor on the position desired.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to open the Objects window.
Objects
Spot Sounding
Depth area
Exclusive economic zone
Military practice area
Restricted area
Source of data
Objects window
4. Use the cursor pad to select the item desired.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to display details for object selected.
Depth area
Depth range value1
0.00 Meters
Depth range value2
1829.00 Meters
Example of caution area window
6. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-14
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Icon data
You may place the cursor on any icon to find information about the selected icon.
1. For example, place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
Place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M
TRIP NU
19.9 kt
99.9 nm
16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
CENTER
GO TO
CURSOR
D. BOX
ON /OFF
Lighthouse icon
2. Push the [ENTER] knob to show data. For example, the following window
appears for a lighthouse.
Objects
Lighthouse
Tower
Light
Underwater Rock
Depth contour
Depth contour
Depth area
Source of data
Object windows
3. Use the cursor pad to select the item desired.
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to display detailed information.
2-15
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Navigation mark, fixed
Light.
Color
white
Height
7. 00 Meters
Light characteristic
occulting
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
Sample lighthouse data
5. Press the RETURN soft key twice to close the Objects window.
Tide information
The C-MAP chart card provides for calculation of the tide heights for any date.
Additionally it displays the times of sunrise and sunset.
1. Press the cursor pad to place the cursor on a Tide icon (
2. Push the [ENTER] knob to open the Objects window.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
+124
OBJECTS
24. 3456 W 59.9kt
NU
024nm
Tide height
Cartographic area
Source of data
T
RETURN
Objects window
3. Use the cursor pad to select “Tide height.”
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to open the TIDE window.
2-16
T
).
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Horizontal
Cursor
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
+124
0.86 24. 3456 W 59.9kt
NU
024nm
0.74
DATE
0.61
0.48
Vertical
Cursor
0.35
0
4
8
12
16 20
24
Time: 04:35
Height: 0.45ft
Draught: 0.65ft
01/07/30 +13:30
43° 32.860N
010° 18.022E
RETURN
Port info
LIVORNO (LEGHORN)
High Water(max) 0.86ft(13:30 L)
Low Water(min) 0.35ft(21:00 L)
Sunrise 07:52L Sunset 16:53 L
Tide window
5. Press the DATE soft key to open the DATE window.
CHANGE DATE
(DAY. MONTH. YEAR)
01. 01. 2001
LIMIT: 31.12.2099
Date window
6. Use ◄ or ► to position the cursor where desired, then rotate the [ENTER]
knob to set character. Repeat to enter complete date.
7. Push the [ENTER] knob to show the tidal graph for entered date.
8. Use ◄ or ► to locate the vertical cursor on the hour desired.
9. Use ▲ or ▼ to shift the level cursor to select draught.
10. See the time, height and draught indications below the tide graph for tide
information.
11. Press the RETURN soft key to close the TIDE window.
Port service icons
Objects
Selected C-MAP shows services available at ports,
with lists.
Port area
Port/Marine
Fuel station
Water
Electricity
Showers
Pubric toilets
Pubric telephone
1. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor on the
sailboat icon (denotes a port or harbor) desired.
2. Push the [ENTER] knob.
3. Select the service name desired. The services
available appear.
4. Press the CANCEL soft key.
C-map, port service display
2-17
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.6
Working with Track
Your ship’s track is plotted on the screen using navigation data fed from
position-fixing equipment. This section shows you what you can do with track,
from turning it on or off to changing its plotting interval. Own ship’s track is
displayed in the default setting and on the color model it is red.
2.6.1
Displaying track
Own ship track
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR
RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
ON
TARGET TRACK COLOR
WHITE
INTERVAL
TIME
TIME INTERVAL
10m00s
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000PTS
(MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
TRACK
CONTROL
EDIT
TRACK
RESUME
ERASE
T&M
MARK
SETUP
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
ON
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
ON
INTERVAL
TIME
TIME INTERVAL
10m00s
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000PTS
(MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS
RETURN
TRACK
CONTROL
EDIT
TRACK
RESUME
ERASE
T&M
MARK
SETUP
RETURN
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
GD-1700C/1710C
GD-1700
Track control menu
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use the cursor pad to select OWN SHIP TRACK DISP.
Press the EDIT soft key to show the track display window.
Use the cursor pad to select ON (default setting) or OFF as appropriate.
Press the ENTER soft key.
Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: The number of track and mark points used appears at the SHIP’S TRACK
STATUS window on the TRACK CONTROL menu. Using the figure above
as an example, 1234 points of track and 9 marks have been recorded.
2-18
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Target track
Target track, NMEA format TTM (Tracked Target Message) data sentence, may
be turned on or off as desired. The default setting is ON.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.
4. Use the cursor pad to select to ON or OFF as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2.6.2
Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship track
When your boat is at anchor or returning to port you probably won’t need to
record its track. You can stop recording the track, to conserve the track memory,
as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
TRACK
CONTROL
▲
▲
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR
RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
ON
TARGET TRACK COLOR
WHITE
INTERVAL
TIME
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000PTS
(MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS
EDIT
TRACK
RESUME
TRACK
RESUME
ERASE
T&M
TRACK
HALT
MARK
SETUP
RETURN
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR
RED
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
ON
TARGET TRACK COLOR
WHITE
INTERVAL
TIME
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00.10nm
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000PTS
(MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
NOT TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
Track is plotted
Track not plotted
TRACK
CONTROL
EDIT
TRACK
HALT
ERASE
T&M
MARK
SETUP
RETURN
Track control menu (GD-1700C/1710C)
2. Press the TRACK RESUME soft key. The soft key now shows “TRACK
HALT” and the indication “TRACKING” in the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
window changes to “NOT TRACKING.” In addition, the icon “H” is displayed
at the top of the plotter display and own ship marker becomes a hollow circle.
To restart plotting the track, press the TRACK HALT soft key.
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-19
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.6.3
Changing track color (GD-1700C/1710C)
Track can be displayed in red (default setting), yellow, green, light-blue, purple,
blue and white. It can be useful to change track color on a regular basis to
discriminate between previous day’s track, etc.
Own ship’s track
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
TRACK COLOR
▲
¤ RED
¡ YELLOW
¡ GREEN
¡ LIGHT BLUE
¡ PURPLE
¡ BLUE
¡ WHITE
▼
Own ship track color window
4. Use the cursor pad to select the color desired.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Target track
Like own ship’s track, target tracks can be displayed in red, yellow, green,
light-blue, purple, blue and white (default setting).
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select TARGET TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
4. Use the cursor pad to select the color desired.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-20
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.6.4
Track plotting method and interval for own ship track
In drawing the own ship track, first the ship’s position fed from position-fixing
equipment is stored into the unit’s memory at an interval of time or distance. A
shorter interval provides for better reconstruction of the track, but the storage
time of the track is reduced. When the track memory becomes full, the oldest
track is erased to make room for the latest.
Track plotting method
Track may be plotted by time or distance. The default setting is “time.”
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select INTERVAL.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the plot window.
INTERVAL
▲
¤ TIME
¡ DISTANCE
▼
Plot window
4. Use the cursor pad to select TIME or DISTANCE as appropriate. Distance is
useful for conserving track memory, since no track is recorded when the boat
is stationary.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Track plotting interval
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select TIME INTERVAL or DISTANCE INTERVAL as
appropriate.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the time or distance interval window,
depending on what you selected at step 2.
TIME INTERVAL
Setting range: 0 min 1 sec (continuous) - 99 min 59 sec
Default setting: 10 sec
00m10s
(When selecting TIME INTERVAL.)
DISTANCE INTERVAL
Setting range: 0.01 nm (continuous) - 99.99 nm (km, sm)
Default setting: 0.1 nm
00.10nm
(When selecting DISTANCE INTERVAL.)
Interval windows
2-21
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
4. Use the [ENTER] knob and the cursor pad to enter numeric data. The
[CLEAR] key functions to clear an entire line of data.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob or ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2.6.5
Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting
The equipment stores a total of 8000 points of track and marks. This amount
may be distributed as desired, and the default setting is 2000 points of track and
6000 marks.
When you change the track memory setting, all tracks and marks in the memory
are erased. If necessary save the data to a memory card. For further details, see
the paragraph “6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card”.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select MEMORY (TRACK & MARK).
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track memory window.
TRACK MEMORY
2000/8000 POINTS
Track memory window
4. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter desired number of track
memory points.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob or ENTER soft key. You are asked if you are sure to
change the track memory capacity.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-22
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.6.6
Erasing track
This paragraph shows you how to erase own ship’s track and target tracks. You
can erase ship’s track three ways: collectively, by color (color model only) and by
area.
Erasing own ship track by area
You can erase own ship’s track by area as below. This feature is not available
when the overlay mode (GD-1700C/1710C only) is in use.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE
EDIT
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
ERASE
EDIT
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
RETURN
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
RETURN
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
GD-1700C/1710C
GD-1700
Erase menu
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE TRACKS BY AREA, then press the
EDIT soft key. The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor at the top left of corner which you
want to erase track from.
4. Press the START soft key or the [ENTER] knob.
5. Move the cursor diagonally to the bottom right corner of the area which you
want to erase track from.
6. Press the END soft key or the [ENTER] knob. You are asked if you are sure
to delete the track.
7. Push the [ENTER] knob to delete the track selected.
8. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
2-23
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Erasing own ship track by color (GD-1700C/1710C)
You may erase own ship’s track by color as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR, then press the
EDIT soft key.
ERASE TRK BY COLOR
▲
¤ RED
¡ YELLOW
¡ GREEN
¡ LIGHT BLUE
¡ PURPLE
¡ BLUE
¡ WHITE
▼
Erase track by color window
3. Use the cursor pad to select the color you want to erase, then push the
[ENTER] knob.
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase the track color selected.
5. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all own ship track
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE ALL TRACKS, then press the EDIT soft
key.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase all own ship track.
4. Press the RETURN soft key.
5. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all target tracks
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE TARGET TRACKS, then press the EDIT
soft key.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase all target tracks.
4. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
2-24
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.7
Marks, Lines
Marks are useful for denoting important points such as a good fishing spot.
Marks can be inscribed in seven shapes and seven colors (GD-1700C/1710C):
Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and white.
¡
✕
Mark shapes
2.7.1
Entering a mark, line
1. Place the cursor where you want a mark to appear.
2. Press the MARK ENTRY soft key. (Press the [HIDE/SHOW] key if the plotter
soft keys are not shown.)
The mark is inscribed in the size and shape selected on the mark & line menu.
The default mark attributes are size, large; color (GD-1700C/1710C), yellow, and
shape, hollow circle (○).
2.7.2
Changing mark attributes
You can select the size, shape and color (color model) for marks on the MARKS
& LINES menu.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.
2. Press the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL and MARK
SETUP soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.
MARKS/LINES COLOR
YELLOW
MARKS SHAPE
¡
.
MARKS &
LINES
EDIT
LINES STYLE
MARKS SHAPE
MARKS &
LINES
LINES STYLE
EDIT
¡
.
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
RETURN
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
GD-1700C/1710C
RETURN
GD-1700
Mark & line menu
3. For the GD-1700C/1710C, do the following to select mark and line color.
a) Select MARKS/LINES COLOR, then press the EDIT soft key.
b) Use the cursor pad to choose color desired. Press the ENTER soft key.
2-25
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
4. Select MARKS SHAPE, then press the EDIT soft key.
MARKS SHAPE
▲
¤ ¡
¡
¡
¡ ✕
¡
¡
¡
▼
Mark shape window
5. Use the cursor pad to select mark shape desired, then press the RETURN
soft key.
6. Select MARKS SIZE, then press the EDIT soft key.
7. Use the cursor pad to select LARGE (default setting) or SMALL as
appropriate.
8. Press [ENTER] knob or ENTER soft key.
9. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
2.7.3
Selecting line type
You may inscribe lines to denote good fishing spots, areas of special interest, etc.
You can even construct simple charts.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and MARK SETUP soft keys to show the MARK & LINES menu.
MARKS &
LINES
MARKS/LINES COLOR
YELLOW
MARKS SHAPE
EDIT
¡
LINES STYLE
.
MARKS SHAPE
MARKS &
LINES
LINES STYLE
EDIT
¡
.
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
RETURN
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK :
9/6000
GD-1700C/1710C
Marks & lines setup menu
2. Select LINE STYLE, then press the EDIT soft key.
2-26
GD-1700
RETURN
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
LINES STYLE
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
- - - -
▼
Mark line window
3. Use the cursor pad to select line style desired. Press the ENTER soft key.
Line style “dot” disables line drawing. The joint between lines is determined
by mark shape. For example, selecting the circle shape will join lines with a
circle as below.
4. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
2.7.4
Erasing marks, lines
Erasing an individual mark
1. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the mark you want to erase.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key to erase the mark.
Erasing an individual line
Place the cursor on an end of the line to erase, then press the [CLEAR] key.
Placing the cursor at the intersecting point of two line segments will erase both
line segments.
Erasing marks, lines by area
This feature is not available when the overlay mode (GD-1700C/1710C only) is
in use.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE MARKS BY AREA and press the EDIT
soft key. The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area
which you want to erase marks and lines from.
4. Press the START soft key or the [ENTER] knob.
5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want
to erase marks and lines from.
6. Press the END soft key or the [ENTER] knob. You are asked if you are sure
to delete the marks/lines selected. Push the [ENTER] knob to delete.
7. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
2-27
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Erasing all marks, lines
You can erase all marks and lines collectively. Be absolutely sure you want to
erase all marks and lines - erased marks and lines cannot be restored.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES, then press the
EDIT soft key.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase all marks and lines.
4. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
2-28
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.8
Waypoints
In navigation terminology, a waypoint is a particular location on a voyage
whether it be a starting, intermediate or destination point. A waypoint is the
simplest piece of information your equipment requires to get you to a destination,
in the shortest distance possible.
This unit has 999 waypoints into which you can enter position information. You
may enter a waypoint five ways: at own ship position, at MOB position (page
1-15), by cursor, by range and bearing, and through the waypoint list (manual
input of latitude and longitude).
2.8.1
Entering waypoints
Entering a waypoint at own ship position
Press the [SAVE/MOB] key momentarily to store your position as a waypoint.
This new waypoint is saved to the waypoint list, under the youngest empty
waypoint number.
Entering a waypoint with the cursor
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and WAYPOINT BY
CURSOR soft keys. The plotter display appears.
3. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor where you want to enter a waypoint.
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows
waypoint mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: date and time),
position of waypoint and proximity alarm radius.
NEW
WPT
MARK NAME
▲
0 0 1 W 359.9°
PT
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
0.00nm
COMMENT
002WPT
02:36 01JAN01
00:00 01JAN00
34°44.000'N
359.9°
135°21.000'W
0.00nm
LA
T
34° 12. 134'N
003WPT
LON
1 3 400:00
° 1 201JAN00
. 345'W
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
SELECT
MARK
COORD
TYPE
"MARK SHAPE"
on monochrome
model
N < - -> S
E < - -> W
SAVE
359.9°
0.00nm
RETURN
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS
0. 00nm
Waypoint window
5. If you do not need to change the waypoint data, press the SAVE soft key
to register the waypoint. The steps which follow show you how to change
waypoint data.
6. For the color model, press the SELECT MARK soft key.
2-29
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
7. Press the MARK SHAPE soft key to open the mark shape selection window.
SELECT MARK
Waypoint mark shape selection window
8. Operate the cursor pad to select shape desired.
9. Press the ENTER soft key.
10. For the GD-1700C/1710C, press the SELECT MARK and MARK COLOR
soft keys in that order to open the waypoint mark color selection window.
Select color desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
SELECT COLOR
▲
¤ RED
¡ YELLOW
¡ GREEN
¡ LIGHT BLUE
¡ PURPLE
¡ BLUE
¡ WHITE
▼
Waypoint mark color selection window
Note: You cannot change the shape and color of a waypoint when the
proximity alarm radius for it is other than “zero.” To change shape or
color, enter all zeroes as the proximity alarm radius.
12. You can change the name (1 to 6 characters), comment (13 characters), L/L
position and the proximity alarm radius for a waypoint as follows:
a) Use the cursor pad to select the NAME, COMMENT, position box or
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS field. (“Proximity alarm radius” provides for
visual and aural alarms when your boat nears a waypoint by the distance
specified. The proximity alarm must be turned on in the ALARM menu to
use this feature. For details see the paragraph “2.11.6 Proximity alarm.”)
b) Use the cursor pad to select location.
c) Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select appropriate alphanumeric character.
13. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
14. Enter another waypoint, or press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-30
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Entering a waypoint by range and bearing
This method is useful when you want to enter a waypoint using range and
bearing to a target found on a radar.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and WAYPOINT BY RNG &
BRG soft keys.
3. An “X” (red on the GD-1700C/1710C) appears at own ship position, and it is
the origin point for range and bearing. Operate the cursor pad to place the
cursor on the location desired. Range and bearing from own ship to the
cursor appear at the top of the display.
Note: The origin point of range and bearing can be shifted to the location
desired. Operate the cursor pad to select location, then press the
START POINT soft key.
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows
mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: date and time), position of
waypoint and proximity alarm radius.
NEW
WPT
MARK NAME
▲
0 0 1 W 359.9°
PT
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
0.00nm
COMMENT
002WPT
02:36 01JAN01
00:00 01JAN00
34°44.000'N
359.9°
135°21.000'W
0.00nm
LA
T
34° 12. 134'N
003WPT
LON
1 3 400:00
° 1 201JAN00
. 345'W
34°44.000'N
135°21.000'W
SELECT
MARK
COORD
TYPE
"MARK SHAPE"
on monochrome
model
N < - -> S
E < - -> W
SAVE
359.9°
0.00nm
RETURN
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS
0. 00nm
Waypoint window
5. If necessary, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in
“Entering a waypoint with the cursor” on page 2-30.
6. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
7. Enter another waypoint as above, or press the [MENU] key to finish.
2-31
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Entering a waypoint from the waypoint list
You can manually enter waypoint position from the waypoint list as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the LOCAL LIST (lists waypoints in order from nearest to furthest) or
ALPHANUMERIC LIST (lists waypoints in alphanumeric order) soft key.
WPT
ALPHA
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
350.9°
3.80 nm
CRAB
00:00 01JAN01
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
050.9°
1.98 nm
065.9°
1.83 nm
LOBSTER
00:00 01JAN01
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
144.9°
4.93nm
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
GOTO
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
EDIT
WPT
ERASE
WPT
RETURN
065.9°
1.83 nm
CRAB
00:00 01JAN01
NEW
WPT
FISH
00:00 01JAN01
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
FISH
00:00 01JAN01
▲
▲
▲
ABALONE
00:00 01JAN01
WPT
LOCAL
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
050.9°
1.98 nm
ABALONE
00:00 01JAN01
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
350.9°
3.80 nm
LOBSTER
00:00 01JAN01
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
144.9°
4.93nm
GOTO
NEW
WPT
EDIT
WPT
ERASE
WPT
RETURN
---
Alphanumeric waypoint list
Local waypoint list
Alphanumeric and local waypoint lists
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key to show the waypoint window (see the figure
on the previous page). Own ship position is shown in the position box.
5. Select the position box and enter position desired.
6. If desired, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in
“Entering a waypoint with the cursor” on page 2-30.
7. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2.8.2
Editing waypoint data
Waypoint data may be edited from the waypoint list or directly from the plotter
display.
Editing waypoint data from the waypoint list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2-32
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as appropriate.
Use the cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to edit.
Press the EDIT WPT soft key.
Edit data as appropriate.
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
7. Press the SAVE soft key.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Editing a waypoint from the plotter display
You may edit waypoints from the plotter display as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and
WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want
to change. A flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is
correctly selected.
4. Press the EDIT/MOVE soft key. Three soft keys replace the EDIT/MOVE soft
key:
EDIT WPT: Edit from the waypoint entry window.
MOVE WPT: Move waypoint to new position with the cursor.
ERASE WPT: Erase waypoint. See paragraph 2.8.3.
5. Press appropriate soft key. For “EDIT WPT,” the waypoint entry window
appears; edit data as appropriate. For “MOVE WPT,” do the following:
a) Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the location desired for the
waypoint. A line connects previous position and new position.
b) Push the [ENTER] knob. The waypoint moves to the cursor position and its
position is changed on the waypoint list. If the waypoint is set as
destination or is part of a route, you are asked if you are sure to move the
waypoint. In this case, push the [ENTER] knob to move the waypoint, or
press the [CLEAR] key to cancel.
c) Press the [MENU] key to finish.
Range and bearing from
own ship to cursor
+
34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M TRIP NU
59.9 nm
99.9 nm
16.0nm
(1) Select waypoint to move,
then press EDIT/MOVE
and MOVE WPT soft keys.
Press to alternately display
range/bearing from own ship
to cursor, range/bearing from
original waypoint position to
cursor position.
Below is an example of the
range/bearing from original
waypoint position to cursor
position.
RNG
BRG
FISH
(2) Drag cursor to new position,
then push the [ENTER] knob.
CANCEL
BRIDGE
WP-002
+
34° 22. 3456’N
080° 22. 3456’E
FROM
FISH
5.3°M
1.45 nm
Plotter display
2-33
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.8.3
Erasing waypoints
Erasing a waypoint directly from the plotter display
1. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to erase.
A flashing diamond mark appears over the waypoint when the waypoint is
correctly selected.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
3. Push the [ENTER] knob. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen and
the waypoint list.
Erasing a waypoint from the menu
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and
WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want
to erase. A flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is
correctly selected.
4. Press the EDIT/MOVE soft key followed by the ERASE WPT soft key. You
are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase the waypoint.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu. The waypoint is erased from the
plotter screen and the waypoint list.
Erasing a waypoint from the waypoint list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key.
Use the cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to erase.
Press the ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the
waypoint.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob. The waypoint is erased from both the waypoint list
and the plotter screen (if it is currently displayed).
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-34
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.8.4
Changing waypoint mark size (FURUNO, NavCharts™)
You may change the size of all waypoint marks to small or large (default), or you
may turn them off.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
LAT LON GRID
GREEN
TEXT INFORMATION
ON
WAYPOINTS
LARGE
WAYPOINT NAMES
ON
CHART BORDER LINES
ON
LANDMASS
BRT YELLOW
BACKGROUND
BLACK
NAVAIDS
ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
ON
OTHER SYMBOLS
WHITE
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
CNTOUR
LINE
RETURN
LAT LON GRID
ON
TEXT INFORMATION
ON
WAYPOINTS
LARGE
WAYPOINT NAMES
ON
CHART BORDER LINES
ON
LANDMASS
BRIGHT
NAVAIDS
ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
ON
OTHER SYMBOLS
ON
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
GD-1700C/1710C
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
CNTOUR
LINE
RETURN
GD-1700
Chart details menu
3. Use the cursor pad to select WAYPOINTS.
4. Press the EDIT soft key.
5. Use the cursor pad to select LARGE, SMALL or OFF.
LARGE: Shows mark in actual shape.
SMALL: Displays all waypoints with an “X” regardless of mark shape
selected.
OFF:
Turns off all waypoints and their names. Waypoints currently used
in navigation are shown regardless of this setting.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-35
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.8.5
Searching waypoints
You can search for a waypoint through the alphanumeric waypoint list as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and ALPHANUMERIC LIST
soft keys to show the alphanumeric list.
▲
▲
ABALONE
00:00 01JAN01
35°47.010'N
135°21.000'W
350.9°
3.80 nm
CRAB
00:00 01JAN01
34°42.000'N
135°21.050'W
050.9°
1.98 nm
FISH
00:00 01JAN01
34°41.000'N
135°21.030'W
065.9°
1.83 nm
LOBSTER
00:00 01JAN01
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W
144.9°
4.93nm
WPT
ALPHA
GOTO
NEW
WPT
EDIT
WPT
ERASE
WPT
RETURN
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Search window
Alphanumeric list
3. Use the cursor pad and the [ENTER] knob to enter up to three alphanumeric
characters in the search window. Then, the waypoint searched appears at
the top of the screen.
4. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-36
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.9
Routes
Often a trip from one place to another involves several course changes,
requiring a series of route points (waypoints) which you navigate to, one after
another. The sequence of waypoints leading to the ultimate destination is called
a route. Your unit can automatically advance to the next waypoint on a route, so
you do not have to change the destination waypoint repeatedly.
You can store up to 200 routes, and a route may have 35 waypoints.
2.9.1
Creating routes
Entering a route with existing waypoints
This method constructs routes by using existing waypoints.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key to open the ROUTE menu. (No data will be
shown if there are no routes created.)
Route name
▲
Total length of route
001
ROUTE
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
35
25.6 nm
GOTO
002
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
2
56.7 nm
003
NEW
ROUTE
EDIT
ROUTE
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
3
21.1 nm
ERASE
ROUTE
004
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
3
21.1 nm
Number of waypoints
in route
RETURN
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Route menu
4. Press the NEW ROUTE soft key to open the new route entry screen.
ROUTE NAME
001
NEW
ROUTE
PLOT
COMMENT
LOCAL
LIST
ALPHA
LIST
CONECT
CANCEL
New route entry screen
2-37
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
5. If desired you can change the route name shown and/or add a comment. A
route name may consist of six characters; comment, 13 characters.
6. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHA LIST soft key to open the waypoint list.
7. Use the cursor pad to select a waypoint, then press the ADD WPT soft key to
add it to the route.
8. Repeat step 7 to complete the route.
Note: To clear a waypoint, press the ERASE LST WP soft key. Each press of
this key deletes the last waypoint entered.
9. Press the SAVE soft key to register the route.
10. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Entering a route with the cursor
This method allows you to construct a route directly from the plotter display,
using existing waypoints or new positions. Any new position will be saved as a
waypoint, under the youngest empty waypoint number.
1. Follow steps 1-5 in “Entering a route from the route list” on the previous
page.
2. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter display.
3. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (ADD WP
soft key appears) or new location (ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
4. Press the ADD WP soft key (or ADD NEW WP soft key).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to register the route.
7. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
2-38
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Creating voyage-based routes
You can create routes based on your ship’s track. The route can be created
automatically by time or distance, or manually. This feature is useful when you
wish to retrace previous track.
The “SAVE” icon ( V E ) appears at the top of the screen when a voyage-based
route is being created.
SA
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the CREATE VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft key.
▲
001
ROUTE
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
35
25.6 nm
NEW
002
SELECT
ROUTE
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
2
56.7 nm
003
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
3
21.1 nm
004
LENGTH
WAYPOINTS
3
21.1 nm
RETURN
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Save route menu
4. Press the NEW soft key to show the new route window.
Note: If you want to tack voyage-based points onto the end of an existing
route, select route desired, then press the SELECT ROUTE soft key
instead of the NEW soft key.
ROUTE NAME
Next consecutive route number
006
SAVE
ROUTE
BCKTRK
TIME
COMMENT
BCKTRK
DIST
USE FURUNO BACK TRACK FUNCTION
TO AUTOMATICALLY CREATE ROUTE
BY TIME OR DISTANCE.
MANUAL
CANCEL
Save route window
5. If required, you may change the route name and enter a comment.
2-39
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
6. Choose how to record points for your route, by time, by distance or manual
entry, by pressing by one of BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK RANGE or MANUAL
soft key as appropriate. For manual entry, go to step 8. For BCKTRK TIME,
BCKTRK DIST one of the following displays appears.
TIME INTERVAL
DISTANCE INTERVAL
00h01m
(When selecting BCKTRK TIME.)
00.1nm
(When selecting BCKTRK DIST.)
Displays for entry of time, distance interval
7. Enter interval desired with the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob. Press the
[ENTER] knob. Press the START and RETURN soft keys followed by the
[MENU] key to close the menu. At this moment, a voyage-based route will be
created.
8. For manual entry of waypoints, do the following:
a) Press the [SAVE/MOB] key momentarily to enter a waypoint mark at own
ship position. A new waypoint is created under the youngest empty
waypoint number and added to the route. (At this time you may close the
SAVE ROUTE screen by pressing the RETURN soft by followed by the
MENU key.)
b) Repeat step a) as necessary. 35 waypoints may be entered.
To stop recording waypoints and save the route
You can stop recording waypoints and save the route at any time as shown in
the procedure below. When 35 waypoints have been entered the message “Total
35 WPTS have been already registered in the route. Stop creating
voyage-based route.” is displayed. In this case, save the route as shown below.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and CREATE
VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft keys.
2. Press the FINISH LOG soft key to stop recording waypoints and save the
route.
3. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-40
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.9.2
Connecting routes
Two routes which you have created can be connected as follows to form a new
route.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key.
Press the NEW ROUTE soft key.
If desired enter name and comment for route.
Press the CONNECT soft key.
Use the cursor pad and the [ENTER] knob to enter the route name for the
first route, beneath FIRST in the connect route window.
ROUTE NAME
NEW
ROUTE
001
F < -- > R
COMMENT
CONNECT ROUTE
FIRST
SECOND
______
______
FORWARD
FORWARD
SAVE
CANCEL
Connect route window
8. If necessary press the F< - ->R soft key to select direction to follow the
waypoints of the route, forward or reverse.
9. Enter the route name of the second route as you did for the first route.
10. Press the SAVE soft key.
11. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: The maximum number of waypoints in a route is 35. If this number is
exceeded an error message appears. In this case, delete waypoints in one
or both routes so the total number of waypoints does not exceed 35.
2-41
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.9.3
Inserting waypoints in a route
Waypoints can be inserted in a route as follows:
Inserting a waypoint from the route list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key.
Use the cursor pad to select a route.
Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key. The route name screen appears.
Press the LOCAL LIST soft key.
EDIT
ROUTE
ROUTE NAME: 001
COMMENT:
01 001WPT
34°44.111'N
135°21.134'W
LEG
▲
29.9°
12.0nm
02 003WPT
34°43.432'N
135°41.456'W
159.9°
6.00nm
03 002WPT
34°14.124'N
135°21.567'W
50.5°
29.8nm
04 005WPT
34°44.569'N
135°21.152'W
359.9°
3.0nm
05 008WPT
34°54.124'N
135°21.888'W
INSERT
WPT
REMOVE
WPT
CHANGE
WPT
COORD
TYPE
RETURN
Edit route menu
7. Press ▲ or ▼ to place the cursor at the location where you want to insert a
waypoint.
8. Press the INSERT WPT or CHANGE WPT soft key as appropriate. The local
waypoint list appears.
LOCAL LIST
▲
001
001WPT
34°44.111'N
135°21.134'W
002
002WPT
34°43.432'N
135°41.456'W
003
003WPT
34°14.124'N
135°21.567'W
004
004WPT
34°34.490'N
135°51.387'W
Waypoint list for editing a route (local list)
2-42
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
9. Use the cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to insert. (You can switch
between the local list and alphanumeric list by using the LOCAL LIST and
ALPHA LIST soft keys.)
10. Press the SELECT WPT or CHANGE WPT soft key, whichever is displayed.
11. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Inserting a waypoint from the plotter display
Inserting a waypoint before first waypoint or after last waypoint in a route
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key.
Use the cursor pad to select a route.
Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key.
Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter screen.
Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the first (or last) waypoint of
the route. A flashing diamond appears over the waypoint when it is correctly
selected.
8. Press the ADD TO START soft key or the ADD TO END soft key depending
on the waypoint you selected at step 7.
9. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (ADD
WPT soft key appears) or new location (ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
10. Press the ADD WPT soft key (ADD NEW WP soft key).
11. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Inserting a waypoint in an intermediate location on a route
1. Follow steps 1 through 6 in “Inserting a waypoint before the first or last
waypoint in a route.”
2. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on a line connecting waypoints.
The SPLIT LEG soft key appears and the line flashes when the line is
correctly selected.
3. Press the SPLIT LEG soft key. The line changes from solid to dashed.
4. The INSERT NEW WP soft key appears. Move the cursor to a new location
or select an existing waypoint, in which case the INSERT WPT key replaces
the INSERT NEW WP key.
5. Press the INSERT WPT soft key (INSERT NEW WP soft key).
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-43
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.9.4
Removing waypoints from a route
Removing a waypoint from the route list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key.
Select a route.
Press the EDIT ROUTE and LOCAL LIST soft keys.
Select the waypoint you want to remove.
Press the REMOVE WPT soft key.
Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Removing a waypoint from the plotter display
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key.
Select a route.
Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key.
Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter screen.
Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to
remove from the route.
8. Press the REMOVE WPT soft key. The route is redrawn, eliminating the
waypoint erased.
9. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2.9.5
Erasing routes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key.
Use the cursor pad to select a route.
Press the ERASE ROUTE soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase
the route.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to erase the route, or the [CLEAR] key to escape.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-44
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.10
Navigation
This section shows you how to get to a desired destination by “quick points,”
waypoints, port services and routes.
Note: Reciprocal setting and canceling of destination is available by outputting
the data sentence ZDA from the NavNet unit connected to the navigator.
2.10.1
Navigating to a “quick point”
The “quick point” feature allows you to navigate to point(s) without retaining the
data indefinitely in your unit’s memory.
Selecting quick point entry method
You need to tell your unit how to set the quick point: 1 POINT, 35 POINTS (up to
35 points) or 35PTS/PORT SVC. (For how to navigate to points/port services
see “2.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services” on page 2-47.)
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
3. Use the cursor pad to select SET GOTO METHOD, then press the EDIT soft
key.
GOTO METHOD
¤ 1 POINT
¡ 35 POINTS
¡ 35PTS/PORT SVC
Goto method window
4. Use the cursor pad to select a method.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Navigating to a single quick point
1. Select “1 POINT” following the procedure in the above paragraph.
2. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (GOTO WPT soft key appears) or a
new location (GOTO CURSOR soft key appears).
3. Depending on the selection you made at step 1, press the GOTO CURSOR
or GOTO WPT soft key.
A solid line (light-blue on the GD-1700C/1710C) with arrows connects between
own ship and destination, which is marked as “QP<01>” for cursor-selected
location or waypoint name in case of waypoint. Arrows on the line show the
direction to follow to get to the point. Range and bearing from own ship to the
destination appear at the top of screen. The quick point is saved to the waypoint
list as waypoint “QP01.”
2-45
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Navigating to multiple quick points
1. Select “35 POINTS” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry
method” on the previous page.
2. Press the GOTO soft key.
3. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (SELECT WPT soft key appears) or
a new location (ADD QP soft key appears).
4. Depending on the action taken at step 3, press the SELECT WPT or ADD
QP soft key. “QP<01>” appears at the cursor location if a quick point is
selected. To erase last-entered quick point (waypoint), press the ERASE LST
QP (ERASE LST WP) soft key.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the [ENTER] knob to finish.
A solid line runs between own ship and first waypoint and a dashed line between
other waypoints. (For the GD-1700C/1710C, those lines are colored light-blue
and green, respectively.) Quick points are numbered in sequential order from
QP<01> and are saved to the waypoint list. Range and bearing from own ship to
the first destination appear at the top of screen. The quick points are saved as a
route, under the name “Q>RTE” (Quick Route).
2.10.2
Navigating to waypoints
Selecting a waypoint from the plotter display
1. Operate the cursor pad to select a waypoint.
2. Press the GOTO WPT soft key.
Note: GOTO method should be selected to “1 POINT” on the PLOTTER SETUP
menu.
Selecting a waypoint from the waypoint list
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.
Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as desired.
Use the cursor pad to select a waypoint.
Press the GOTO soft key, and the plotter display appears.
For either of the above methods, a solid line (light-blue on the
GD-1700C/1710C) runs between waypoint selected and own ship’s position.
Arrows on the line show the direction to the follow to get to the waypoint.
Waypoint data appears at the top of screen.
2-46
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Selecting an external waypoint
You can select a waypoint (or route) entered at an external plotter connected
with NMEA cable. This function requires RMB sentence.
1. Press the [MENU] key, PLOTTER SETUP soft key to show the PLOTTER
SETUP menu.
2. Use the trackball to select QP.
3. Press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] key to show the QP window.
QP
¡ EXT WPT (RMB)
¤ INTERNAL
QP window
4. Select EXT WPT (RMB).
5. On a connected external plotter, set a waypoint (or route) as the destination.
Selected waypoint (route) appears on the NavNet plotter screen. (on radar
screen, a lollipop appears to show the waypoint.)
2.10.3
Navigating to ports, port services (NavCharts™ only)
NavCharts™ have a port service list which shows services available at ports or
harbors. (See page 2-13.) You can use the list to set your destination as follows:
1. Select “35 PTS/PORT SVC” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point
entry method” on page 2-45.
2. Place the cursor on the location desired, then press the GOTO soft key. Then,
soft key titles change as in the figure below.
+ 40°45.971'N
13°57.462'E
FROM
OS
0.26 nm
180.2°M
16.0nm
GOTO
QUICK
ROUTE
NEAR
SRVC
PORT
PUNTA CORNACCHIA
ACCO AMENO
ISCHIA
PORTO
CASAMICCIOLA
CANCEL
GOTO
I. ISCHIA
Plotter display
3. Press the PORT or NEAR SRVC soft key depending on objective. PORT
shows a list of ports in your area. NEAR SRVC displays the port service list.
2-47
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
PORT & SERVICE
SELECT PORT & SRVC
▼
▲
¡
¡
¤
¡
ACCIAROLI
ACQUAMORTA
AGNONE S. NICOLA
AGROPOLI
AMALFI
BAIA
CAPRI
CASA MICCIOLA-ISCHIA
TM
Port list (NavChart , Italy)
¡
¡
¡
¡
PORT & SERVICE
WC
▼
TM
Port services (NavChart )
Port services (C-MAP)
Port services and sample port list
4. If you selected PORT (NavCharts™ only) at step 3, use the cursor pad to
select a port and press the ENTER soft key. Make a route using the soft keys,
then push the [ENTER] knob. (If you want to go directly to that port, simply
press the ADD QP soft key followed by the [ENTER] knob.)
If you selected NEAR SRVC at step 3, select service mark desired with the
cursor pad, then press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob. Then, the
display shows the locations of those services nearest you. (The figure below
shows the location of filling stations in an area in southern Italy.) Use the
cursor pad to place the “hand cursor” on the port service icon desired and
press the ENTER soft key. Make a route using the soft keys, then push the
[ENTER] knob. (If you want to go directly to location selected, simply press
the ADD QP soft key followed by the [ENTER] knob.)
+ 40°45.971'N
13°57.462'E
FROM
OS
0.26 nm
GOTO
180.2°M
16.0nm
ENTER
PUNTA CORNACCHIA
ACCO AMENO
ISCHIA
PORTO
CASAMICCIOLA
CANCEL
GOTO
I. ISCHIA
Sample filling station locations (southern Italy)
2-48
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.10.4
Following a route
Selecting the route to follow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the ROUTES soft key to open the route list.
Select a route.
Press the GOTO soft key to show the plotter display. The cursor is on the
waypoint nearest own ship.
FISH
359.2°M 104.5°M
83.2nm 10.0 kt
GOTO
ROUTE
16.0 nm
WP-002
GOTO
WPT
FISH
RVRSE
ROUTE
WP-001
RETURN
CRAB
Plotter display, route selected as destination
6. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint or leg in the route
from where to start navigating the route.
7. Press the GOTO WPT or FOLLOW LEG soft key, depending on the action
taken at step 6.
A solid line runs between own ship and the first waypoint and all other waypoints
are connected with a dashed line. (For the GD-1700C/1710C, those lines are
colored light-blue and green, respectively.) The arrows on the lines show the
direction to traverse the route.
Navigating waypoints in reverse order
Press the RVRSE ROUTE soft key to navigate waypoints in reverse order. The
arrows on the route line point in the direction selected.
2-49
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Restarting navigation
When you steer to avoid an obstacle or the vessel drifts, you may go off your
intended course, as in Line 1 in the figure below. Also, if you don’t need to return
to the original course, you can go directly to the next waypoint, as in Line 2 in
the figure below. In these cases, use the restart function to restart navigation.
Line 2
Obstacle
Line 1
Original course
Example of when to restart navigation
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the LOG soft key.
Destination waypoint (WPT name against bright background)
Passed waypoint (green characters)
Estimated Time of Arrival at destination
LOG
ETA 23:59 11.FEB
01 001WPT
34°44.111'N
135°21.134'W
▲
Replaces triangle
when selecting a
route leg.
02 003WPT
34°43.432'N
135°41.456'W
03 002WPT
34°14.124'N
135°21.567'W
04 005WPT
34°44.569'N
135°21.152'W
05 008WPT
34°54.124'N
135°21.888'W
LEG
RESTART
29.9°
12.0nm
STOP
159.9°
6.00nm
50.5°
29.8nm
359.9°
3.0nm
Replaced by
"FOLLOW LEG"
when selecting
a route leg.
RVRSE
SPEED
COORD
TYPE
Log display
4. Use the cursor pad to select a waypoint or a route leg. When a route leg is
selected the single arrow cursor is replaced by double arrows.
5. Press the RESTART soft key, or FOLLOW LEG soft key in case of route leg.
Note: Navigation may be restarted from the plotter display, with the
RESTART key, when a single quick point (QP<01>) is selected for
navigation.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2-50
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Setting speed for ETA calculation
Speed, which may be input manually or automatically, is required to calculate
ETA (Estimated Time of Arrival) to a destination.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the LOG soft key.
Press the SPEED soft key.
SPEED FOR ETA
▲
¤ SPD 010.0kt
¡ GPS AVG. SPEED
▼
Select speed for ETA window
5. Enter speed manually in the SPD field, or use GPS speed data (if applicable)
by selecting GPS AVG. SPEED.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Switching waypoints
When you arrive to a waypoint on a route, you can switch to the next waypoint
by one of the three methods below.
PERPENDICULAR: Automatically switches the TO waypoint when the boat
passes an imaginary perpendicular line passing through the center of the
destination waypoint.
ARRVL ALM CRCL: Automatically switches the TO waypoint when the boat
comes within the arrival alarm range. For how to set the arrival alarm, see the
paragraph “2.11.2 Arrival alarm.”
MANUAL: The destination waypoint may be manually switched by using the
RESTART soft key (see page 2-50). This function is operative when “1 POINT” is
selected as the GOTO method (see page 2-45).
WPT 2
WPT 2
Waypoint switched
at this point.
WPT 1
Perpendicular
Waypoint switched
at this point.
WPT 1
Arrival Alarm Circle
Automatic waypoint switching methods
2-51
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
To select waypoint switching method do the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
Use the cursor pad to select WAYPOINT SWITCHING.
Press the EDIT soft key to show the waypoint switching window.
Use the cursor pad to select appropriate waypoint switching method;
PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL (default setting), or MANUAL.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
2.10.5
Cancelling route navigation
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2-52
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
Press the LOG soft key.
Press the STOP soft key.
Push the [ENTER] knob.
Press the RELEASE soft key.
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.11
Alarms
The plotter section has eight conditions which generate both audio and visual
alarms: arrival alarm, anchor watch alarm, XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm,
proximity alarm, speed alarm, trip alarm, water temperature alarm and bottom
alarm. (The bottom and water temperature alarms, which require depth and
water temperature data, may also be set on the sounder alarm menu. For these
alarms see Chapter 4.)
You may set up the plotter alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed
by pressing the [ALARM] key.
AUDIO ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
ARRIVAL ALARM
OFF 0.010nm
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
OFF 0.010nm
PROXIMITY ALARM
OFF
XTE ALARM
OFF 0.050nm
SPEED ALARM
OFF
TRIP ALARM
OFF 0000.0nm
BOTTOM ALARM
OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM
OFF
ALARM1
EDIT
ALARM2
EDIT
NEXT
PAGE
CLEAR
ALARM
NEXT
PAGE
CLEAR
ALARM
PREV.
PAGE
PREV.
PAGE
RETURN
ALARM INFORMATION
NO ALARM
ALARM INFORMATION
NO ALARM
Page 1
Page 2
Plotter alarm menu
2.11.1
Audio alarm on/off
Audio and visual alarms are released whenever an alarm setting is violated. You
can enable or disable the audio alarm as follows:
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select AUDIO ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
AUDIO ALARM
¡ INT & EXT BUZZ
¤ INTERNAL BUZZ
¡ OFF
Audio alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm),
INTERNAL BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF. This turns on or off the audio
alarm globally for all alarms, including radar.
5. Press the ENTER soft key followed by the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
2-53
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.11.2
Arrival alarm
The arrival alarm informs you that your boat is approaching a destination
waypoint. The area that defines an arrival zone is that of a circle which you
approach from the outside of the circle. The alarm will be released if your boat
enters the circle. When the arrival alarm is active a dashed circle (red on the
GD-1700C/1710C) marks the arrival alarm area.
Note: Arrival alarm and anchor watch alarm cannot be set together.
Alarm
range
Own ship
: Alarm area
Destination
waypoint
How the arrival alarm works
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ARRIVAL ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the arrival alarm window.
ARRIVAL ALARM
▲
¡ ON 0.010nm
¤ OFF
▼
Arrival alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON.
5. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to
select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value. The available arrival alarm
range is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
2-54
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.11.3
Anchor watch alarm
The anchor watch alarm informs you that your boat is moving when it should be
at rest. When the anchor watch is active, a dashed circle (red on the
GD-1700C/1710C) with an “X” at its center marks the anchor watch area.
Alarm
setting
Your ship's position where
you start the anchor watch
alarm.
: Alarm
area
How the anchor watch alarm works
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select ANCHOR WATCH ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the anchor alarm window.
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
▲
¡ ON 0.050nm
¤ OFF
▼
Anchor watch alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON.
5. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to
select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value. The available anchor
watch range is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
Note: If the arrival alarm range is changed, turn off the anchor watch alarm and
then turn it on again to give priority to the anchor watch alarm.
2-55
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.11.4
XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm
The XTE alarm warns you when your boat is off its intended course. When the
XTE alarm is active two dashed lines (red on the GD-1700C/1710C) mark the
XTE alarm area.
Own ship
position
Alarm
setting
Destination
waypoint
Intended
course
: Alarm
How the XTE alarm works
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select XTE ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the XTE alarm window.
XTE ALARM
▲
¡ ON 0.050nm
¤ OFF
▼
XTE alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to
select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value. The available XTE alarm
range is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
2.11.5
Speed alarm
The speed alarm warns when your boat’s speed is within or under/over the
speed range set.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select SPEED ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the speed alarm window.
SPEED ALARM
▲
¡
¡
¤
▼
WITHIN
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
UNDER/OVER
000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
OFF
Speed alarm window
2-56
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
4. Use the cursor pad to select WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, or OFF.
5. For WITHIN and UNDER/OVER, use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to
enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set
value.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
2.11.6
Proximity alarm
The proximity alarm alerts you when own ship nears a waypoint, which is
marked with the proximity mark, by the proximity alarm radius set for that
waypoint on the waypoint list. When own ship is within a waypoint’s proximity
alarm radius, the alarm sounds. The proximity mark remains on the screen until
the proximity alarm is turned off or the waypoint is erased. (Note that the
GD-1700C/1710C shows the proximity mark in red.)
Radius in proportion to
proximity alarm radius,
which is set on waypoint list
001WPT
Proximity mark
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select PROXIMITY ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the proximity alarm window.
PROXIMITY ALARM
▲
¤ ON
¡ OFF
▼
Proximity alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON or OFF.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
2-57
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.11.7
Trip alarm
The trip alarm informs you when you have traveled a certain distance.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select TRIP ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the trip alarm window.
TRIP ALARM
▲
¡ ON 0000.0nm
¤ OFF
▼
Trip alarm window
4. Select ON with the cursor.
5. Use the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to
select digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
7. Press the Press the [ALARM] key to close the menu.
2-58
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
2.11.8
Alarm information
When an alarm setting has been violated, the buzzer sounds and the speaker
icon appears, in red on the color model. Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the
alarm. You can see which alarm has been violated on the ALARM menu. In the
example below the arrival alarm has been violated.
1. Press the [ALARM] key. The name of the offending alarm is shown in the
alarm information window.
AUDIO ALARM
INT & EXT BUZZ
ARRIVAL ALARM
ON 0.010nm
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
OFF 0.010nm
PROXIMITY ALARM
OFF
XTE ALARM
OFF 0.050nm
SPEED ALARM
OFF
TRIP ALARM
OFF 0000.0nm
ALARM1
EDIT
CLEAR
ALARM
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
ALARM INFORMATION
Alarm information
window
ARRIVED
AT WAYPOINT XXX!
Speaker icon
XXX = Destination waypoint name
Alarm menu
2. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the
alarm if it was not done with the [CLEAR] key). For the color model, the
speaker icon changes from red to background color. The speaker icon
remains on the screen until the reason for the alarm is eliminated or the
alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been violated the message
CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this
case, press the NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been
violated.
Note: For the color model, the alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is
violated, and changes to background color when the [CLEAR] key or
CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The color does not change
regardless of how many other alarms are violated.
3. Press the [ALARM] key to close the alarm menu.
2-59
2. PLOTTER OPERATION
Alarm messages
The table below shows the plotter alarm messages and their meanings.
Plotter alarm messages and their meanings
Message
ARRIVED AT XXX WAYPOINT!
(XXX = waypoint name)
ENTERED INTO AVOIDANCE
AREA!
EXCEEDED ANCHOR WATCH
LIMIT!
EXCEEDED XTE LIMIT!
SPEED ALARM!
TEMPERATURE ALARM!
TRIP ALARM! MILEAGE
EXCEEDED
2.12
Meaning
Arrival alarm violated.
Proximity alarm violated.
Anchor watch alarm violated.
XTE alarm violated.
Speed alarm violated.
Water temperature alarm
violated.
Trip alarm violated.
Resetting Trip Distance
Trip distance is shown on the navigation data display. You can reset the trip
distance to zero as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and GENERAL SETUP soft keys in
that order to show the GENERAL SETUP menu.
▲
KEY BEEP
ON
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
RANGE UNIT
nm, kt
TEMPERATURE UNIT
°F
DEPTH UNIT
ft
TEMPERATURE SOURCE
NMEA
DEPTH SOURCE
NMEA
RESET TRIP LOG
NO
GENERAL
SETUP1
EDIT
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
General setup menu, page 1
3.
4.
5.
6.
2-60
Use the cursor pad to select RESET TRIP LOG, then press the EDIT soft key.
Use the cursor pad to select YES.
Press the ENTER soft key.
Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3.
RADAR OPERATION
This chapter covers radar operation, including the ARP (Auto Plotter) function.
ARP requires a Model 1800/1900 series network radar equipped with the ARP
circuit board.
3.1
Radar Display
Cursor
North marker
Heading
M: Magnetic
T: True
Pulselength
Range/
range ring
interval
Presentation
mode
..250 /SP.125nm
Heading line
319.9°M
H-UP
Alarm icon
Battery icon
TRAIL 30m
02m30s
G1 IN
G2 OUT
ES L
EAV L
IR L
Trail time
Trail elapsed time
Guard zone 1
Guard zone 2
Echo stretch
Echo averaging*
Interference rejector
Guard zone 2
VRM2
EBL1
VRM1
Guard zone 1
EBL2
Range ring
Own ship vector
(ARP required*,
true vector mode)
Zoom area
Zoom
window
* = Radar source
Model 1800/1900
series radar
EBL2
EBL1 range
EBL1
VRM1 range
VRM2
VRM1
0 .225nm
0 .158nm
27.0°R
327.1°R
359.9°R
0.240nm
EBL2 bearing, VRM2 range
Cursor range
and bearing
(Cursor position may
also be shown, in
L/L or Loran C TD.)
Radar display
3-1
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.2
Transmitting, Stand-by
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Confirm that the network radar is plugged in.
Press the [DISP] key to select a radar display.
Press the [POWER/BRILL] key momentarily.
Press the RADAR STBY soft key to highlight TX on its label.
Press the RETURN soft key.
When the radar picture is not required, but you want keep it in a state of
readiness, press the RADAR TX soft key to highlight STBY on its label.
3.3
Tuning
The radar receiver can be tuned automatically or manually, and the default
tuning method is automatic. If you require manual tuning, do the following
:
1. Press the [MENU] key to display the main menu.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select TUNING, then press the EDIT soft key.
TUNING
¤ AUTO
¡ MAN
Tuning bar
Tuning window
4.
5.
6.
7.
Choose MAN.
Adjust the [ENTER] knob so the tuning bar is at its longest position.
Press the RETURN soft key.
Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: If the auto setting does not provide satisfactory tuning, ask your dealer
how to re-adjust tuning.
3.4
Adjusting the Gain
The [GAIN] key adjusts the sensitivity of the radar receiver. It works in a manner
similar to the volume control of a broadcast receiver, which amplifies received
signals.
The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen.
If your gain setting is too low, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand,
excessive gain yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed
because of the poor contrast between desired echoes and the background noise
on the display.
To adjust the receiver sensitivity, transmit on long range, and then do the
following:
3-2
3. RADAR OPERATION
1. Press the [GAIN] key. The last-used “adjustment window” is displayed. In the
example below, the gain sensitivity adjustment window is shown. The gain
soft keys shown depend on radar source as shown below.
Item selected for adjustment is highlighted.
319.9°M
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
GAIN
ADJUST
¤ AUTO
¡ AUTO
¡ AUTO
¡ MAN
ROUGH
MODERATE
CALM
0
H-UP
GAIN
A/C
SEA
A/C
SEA
A/C
RAIN
A/C
RAIN
FTC
A/C AT
ON /OFF
359.9°R
0.240nm
RETURN
GAIN SENSITIVITY
+
GAIN
ADJUST
GAIN
RETURN
GAIN SENSITIVITY
319.9°M
.250/SP.125nm
Model 1700 series radar
¤ AUTO
¡ AUTO
¡ AUTO
¡ MAN
ROUGH
MODERATE
CALM
0
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
Model 1800/1900 series radar
Gain adjustment soft keys
2. If the gain sensitivity window is not displayed, press the GAIN soft key to
show it.
GAIN SENSITIVITY
¤ AUTO
¡ AUTO
¡ AUTO
¡ MAN
ROUGH
MODERATE
CALM
0
Gain sensitivity window
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or
MAN (manual) as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea
state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust. The range of
adjustment is 0-100.
5. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or the RETURN soft key to finish.
3-3
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.5
Reducing Sea Clutter
3.5.1
How the A/C SEA works
Echoes from waves can be troublesome, covering the central part of the display
with random signals known as “sea clutter”. The higher the waves and the higher
the antenna above the water, the further the clutter will extend. Sea clutter may
affect radar performance because real targets are sometimes hidden by the
echoes of small waves. (See the left-hand figure in the figure below.) When sea
clutter masks the picture, adjust the A/C SEA to reduce the clutter.
The A/C SEA reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where clutter
is the greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range increases,
so amplification will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea clutter.
Sea clutter at
screen center
A/C SEA adjusted;
sea clutter suppressed
Effect of A/C SEA
3.5.2
Adjusting A/C SEA
A/C SEA should be adjusted so that the clutter is broken up into small dots, and
small targets become distinguishable.
1. Press the [GAIN] key.
2. Press the A/C SEA soft key to show the A/C SEA setting window.
A/C SEA
¡ AUTO
¡ AUTO
¡ AUTO
¤ MAN
ROUGH
MODERATE
CALM
A/C SEA
0
0
Model 1700 series radar
Model 1800/1900 series radar
A/C SEA setting window
3. When the radar source is the Model 1700 series radar, press ▲ or ▼ to
select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or MAN (manual)
as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust while observing
radar echoes. The range of adjustment is 0-100. Do not overadjust the A/C
SEA – weak target echoes may be missed.
3-4
3. RADAR OPERATION
5. When the radar source is the Model 1800/1900 series radar, A/C SEA and
A/C RAIN can be automatically adjusted. Press the A/C AT soft key to select
ON or OFF as appropriate. When turned on, it overrides A/C SEA and A/C
RAIN settings.
6. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
3.6
Reducing Precipitation Clutter
The vertical beamwidth of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even
when the ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect
precipitation clutter (rain, snow, hail, etc.) in the same manner as normal targets.
Precipitation clutter shows as random dots on the screen.
3.6.1
Adjusting the A/C RAIN
When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C RAIN to split
up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making recognition of solid
targets easier.
1. Press the [GAIN] key.
2. Press the A/C RAIN soft key to show the A/C RAIN window.
A/C RAIN
0
A/C RAIN setting window
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust the A/C RAIN. The current level is shown
on the A/C RAIN level bar in the A/C RAIN window, and the range of
adjustment is 0 to 100(%). Do not overadjust the A/C RAIN – weak target
echoes may be missed.
4. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
3-5
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.6.2
Adjusting the FTC
To suppress rain clutter from heavy storms or scattered rain clutter, adjust the
FTC, which is available with the Model 1700 series network radar. The FTC
splits up these unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making recognition of
solid targets easier.
Note: In addition to reducing clutter, the FTC can be used in fine weather to
clarify the picture when navigating in confined waters. However, with the
circuit active the receiver is less sensitive. Therefore, turn off the FTC, by
setting it for “0”, when its function is not required.
1. Press the [GAIN] key.
2. Press the FTC soft key to show the FTC window.
FTC
0
FTC setting window
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is 0-100(%). Do
not overadjust the FTC – weak target echoes may be missed.
4. Press the [GAIN] key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
3-6
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.7
Range Scale
The range setting determines the size of the area (in nautical miles) that will
appear on your display. In addition, the range setting will also automatically
adjust the range ring interval so that accurate range measurements may be
made while operating on any range setting.
The range, range ring interval and pulselength appear at the top left-hand corner
of the display.
Press the [RANGE (+ or -)] key to change the range scale.
Range scales (nm, sm)
Range
0.125
0.25
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
4
6
8
12
16
24
36
48
64
72
Ring
Interval
0.0625
0.125
0.125
0.25
0.25
0.5
0.5
1
1
2
2
3
4
6
12
12
16
18
No. of
Rings
2
2
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
4
4
4
3
4
4
4
Range scales (km)
Range
0.25
0.5
0.75
1
1.5
2
3
4
6
8
12
16
24 36
48
64
72
Ring
Interval
0.125
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.5
0.5
1
1
2
2
3
4
6
12
12
16
18
No. of
Rings
2
2
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
4
4
4
3
4
4
4
Note 1: Maximum range depends on the network radar as shown below.
Model 1722, 1722C, 1723C, 1823C: 24 nm
Model 1732, 1732C, 1742, 1742C, 1752, 1752C, 1733, 1753C, 1833, 1833C
; 36 nm
Model 1762, 1762C, 1763C, 1933, 1933C: 48 nm
Model 1943, 1943C: 64 nm
Model 1953C: 72 nm
3-7
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.8
Pulselength
The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper left corner of the display.
Appropriate pulselengths are preset to individual range scales. Therefore, you
are not usually required to select them. If you are not satisfied with the current
pulselength setting, however, it is possible to change it for the ranges shown
below. Generally, select a longer pulse for longer detection range and shorter
pulse for better range discrimination.
1.5 nm 1.5 sm, 3 km: Short pulse, medium pulse
3 nm , 3 sm, 6 km: Medium pulse, long pulse
1. Press HIDE/SHOW to show soft the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
SIGNAL
PROCESS
I. REJ
LOW
E. AVG
OFF
PULSE
E. STR
LOW
Shown when radar
source is the Model
1800/1900 series
network radar. Not
shown otherwise.
RETURN
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
Signal process soft keys
3. Choose the 1.5 or 3 nm range with the RANGE key.
4. Press the PULSE soft key to select the pulselength setting. SHORT or
MEDIUM for 1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km and MEDIUM or LONG for 3 nm, 3 sm,
6 km.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
3-8
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.9
Presentation Mode
This unit provides four radar presentation modes: head-up, course-up, north-up
and true motion.
Heading data is required for modes other than head-up.
3.9.1
Selecting a presentation mode
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show soft the radar soft keys.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key to show the RADAR DISPLAY soft keys.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
RADAR
DISPLAY
319.9°M
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
RADAR
DISPLAY
MODE
HD UP
MODE
HD UP
+
SHIFT
SHIFT
RINGS
MED
RINGS
ON /OFF
HL
HL
OFF
OFF
RETURN
RETURN
359.9°R
0.240nm
GD-1700C/1710C
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
GD-1700
Radar display soft keys
3. Press the MODE soft key. Each pressing of the key changes the presentation
mode and the presentation mode indication in the sequence of North-up
(NTH UP), True Motion (TRUE M), Head-up (HD UP), and Course-up (CSE
UP).
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note:
When heading data is lost, the presentation mode automatically goes to
head-up, the heading indication at the screen top shows “- - -.-°” and the
audio alarm sounds. Press the [ALARM] key to acknowledge the alarm.
The message “HEADING DATA MISSING” appears. Restore compass
signal to show heading indication. Use the MODE soft key to select
presentation mode if necessary. The audio alarm may be silenced with
the [CLEAR] key.
3-9
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.9.2
Description of presentation modes
Head-up (H-UP)
A display without azimuth stabilization in which the line connecting the center
with the top of the display indicates own ship’s heading. Targets are painted at
their measured distances and in their directions relative to own ship’s heading.
The short line on the bearing scale is the north marker.
North Marker
Heading Line
Head-up presentation mode
Course-up (C-UP)
The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with the currently selected course at
the top of the screen. As you change heading, the ship’s heading line moves. If
you select a new course, the picture resets to display the new course at the top
of the display.
Targets are painted at their measured distances and in their directions relative to
the intended course which is maintained at the 0-degree position. The heading
line moves in accordance with ship’s yawing and course changes.
North Marker
Heading Line
Course-up presentation mode
3-10
3. RADAR OPERATION
North-up (N-UP)
In the north-up mode, targets are painted at their measured distances and in
their true (compass) directions from own ship. North is maintained at the top of
the screen. The heading line changes its direction according to ship’s heading.
North
Heading Line
North-up presentation mode
True motion (TR-M)
Fixed radar targets maintain a constant position on the screen, while your own
ship moves across the radar image at the correct speed and heading. A map-like
image is displayed, with all moving vessels traveling in true perspective to each
other and to fixed landmasses. As your ship’s position approaches the edge of
the screen, the radar display is automatically reset to reveal the area ahead of
your ship. You can manually reset your ship’s position at any time by pressing
the RADAR DISPLY soft key followed by the SHIFT soft key.
North
Heading Line
True motion presentation mode
3-11
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.10
Measuring the Range
You can measure the range to a radar target three ways: by the range rings, by
the cursor, and by the VRM (Variable Range Marker).
3.10.1
Measuring range by range rings
Count the number of rings between the center of the display and the target.
Check the range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner
edge of the nearest ring.
To turn the range rings on, do the following:
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
RADAR
DISPLAY
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
RADAR
DISPLAY
MODE
HD UP
MODE
HD UP
+
SHIFT
SHIFT
RINGS
MED
RINGS
ON /OFF
HL
HL
OFF
OFF
RETURN
RETURN
359.9°R
0.240nm
GD-1700C/1710C
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
GD-1700
Radar display soft keys
3. Press the RINGS soft key to select ON (GD-1700) or desired brilliance
(GD-1700C/1710C) among LOW, MED and HIGH.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
3-12
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.10.2
Measuring range by cursor
Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor intersection on the inside edge of the
radar target. The range to the target, as well as the bearing, appears to the right
of “+” at the bottom of the display.
Target
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
SIGNAL
PROC
Cursor
RADAR
DISPLY
NAV
FUNC
TARGET
ZOOM &
D. BOX
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
Bearing and
range from own
ship to cursor
position
How to measure range and bearing to a target with the cursor
3-13
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.10.3
Measuring range by VRM
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to display the EBL/VRM soft keys.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
EBL/VRM soft keys
2. Press the VRM1 ON (dotted ring VRM) or VRM2 ON (dashed ring VRM) soft
key to select the desired VRM. The selected VRM’s indication, at the bottom
of the screen, is highlighted.
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob the place the VRM on the inside edge of a radar
target. Read the VRM indication to find range to the target.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
VRM1
(Dotted line)
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
(Dashed line)
VRM2
ON
EBL1
VRM1 range
VRM1
---.-°R
0.119nm
EBL2
VRM2
---.-°R
0.242nm
+ 359.9°R
0.240nm
Active marker is highlighted.
VRM2 range
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the [EBL/VRM] key.
How to measure range with the VRM
3-14
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.10.4
Erasing a VRM, VRM indication
Press appropriate VRM soft key, then press the [CLEAR] key. The VRM is
erased and its indication becomes blank.
3.10.5
Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes
Press the EBL or VRM soft key associated with the EBL/VRM data box you wish
to erase. Press the [CLEAR] key once or twice to erase the data box.
3.10.6
Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes
Press the ZOOM & D. BOX and D. BOX ON/OFF soft keys to show or hide the
EBL/VRM data boxes.
3.10.7
Moving EBL/VRM data boxes
When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target you want to see, you can
move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done when the
EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to turn off the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Using the cursor pad, move the cursor inside the data box you wish to move.
As the cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the [ENTER] knob,
and the hand changes to a fist, meaning the data box is correctly selected.
3. Use the cursor pad to move the data box to the location desired, then push
the [ENTER] knob.
3.11
Measuring the Bearing
There are two ways to measure the bearing to a target: by the cursor, and by the
EBL (Electronic bearing Line).
3.11.1
Measuring bearing by cursor
Use the cursor pad to place the cursor at the center of the target. The bearing to
the target appears in the range and bearing box at the bottom right-hand corner
on the screen.
3.11.2
Measuring bearing by EBL
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key.
2. Press the EBL1 ON (dotted line EBL) or EBL2 ON (dashed line EBL) soft key
to select the desired EBL. The selected EBL’s indication, at the bottom of the
screen, is highlighted.
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to bisect the radar target with the EBL. Read the
EBL indication to find the bearing to the target.
4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the [EBL/VRM] key.
3-15
3. RADAR OPERATION
319.9°M
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
EBL1
(Dotted line)
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
EBL2
ON
EBL2
(Dashed line)
VRM2
ON
EBL2 bearing
EBL1 bearing
R: Relative
T: True
EBL1
VRM1
330.1°R
-.---nm
EBL2
VRM2
234.1°R
-.---nm
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
Active marker is highlighted.
How to measure bearing with the EBL
Note: The bearing to a target may be shown relative to own ship’s heading
(Relative) or True bearing (requires heading data). This may be done with
“EBL REFERENCE,” which is in the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu.
3.11.3
Erasing an EBL, EBL indication
Press appropriate EBL soft key, then press the [CLEAR] key. The EBL is erased
and its indication becomes blank.
3.11.4
Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes
Press the EBL or VRM soft key associated with the EBL/VRM data box you wish
to erase. Press the [CLEAR] key once or twice to erase the data box.
3.11.5
Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes
Press the ZOOM & D. BOX and D. BOX ON/OFF soft keys to show or hide the
EBL/VRM data boxes.
3.11.6
Moving EBL/VRM data boxes
When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target you want to see, you can
move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done when the
EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to turn off the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Using the cursor pad, move the cursor inside the data box you wish to move.
As the cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the [ENTER] knob,
and the hand changes to a fist, meaning the data box is correctly selected.
3. Use the cursor pad to move the data box to the location desired, then push
the [ENTER] knob.
3-16
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.12
Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker
The heading line indicates the ship's heading in all presentation modes. It is a
line from the own ship position to the outer edge of the radar display area and
appears at zero degrees on the bearing scale in head-up mode; it changes its
orientation in the north-up, course-up and true motion modes with ship’s
movement.
The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up and course-up
modes the north marker moves around the bearing scale as the ship’s heading
moves.
To temporarily erase the heading line and north marker, press the RADAR
DISPLY soft key followed by the HL OFF soft key. Release the key to redisplay
the markers. (If the radar soft keys are not shown, hit the [HIDE/SHOW] key to
display them.)
3.13
Reducing Noise
Noise, appearing on the displays as random “speckles,” can be reduced as
follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
Select NOISE REJECTION, then press the EDIT soft key.
Select OFF, LOW or HIGH as appropriate.
Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob.
Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-17
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.14
Reducing Radar Interference
Radar interference may occur when near another shipborne radar that is
operating in the same frequency band as your radar. Its on-screen appearance
looks like many bright dots either scattered at random or in the form of dotted
lines extending from the center to the edge of the display. Interference effects
are distinguishable from normal echoes because they do not appear in the same
place on successive rotations of the scanner.
Be sure to turn off the interference rejection circuit when no interference exists –
weak targets may be missed.
Radar interference
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
SIGNAL
PROCESS
I. REJ
LOW
E. AVG
OFF
PULSE
E. STR
LOW
Shown when radar
source is the Model
1800/1900 series
network radar. Not
shown otherwise.
RETURN
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
Signal process soft keys
3. Press the I. REJ soft key successively to choose the interference rejection
level desired; LOW, MED, HIGH or OFF.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows IR L (Low), IR M (Medium) or IR H (High) when the
interference rejector is on.
3-18
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.15
Zoom
The zoom feature allows you to double the size of the area selected with the
“zoom circle.” It is available on any range but is inoperative in true motion and
when the display is shifted.
3.15.1
Zooming in on radar targets
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
Use the cursor pad to set the cursor where you want to zoom.
Press the ZOOM & D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.
Press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ON. A solid circle, called the
“zoom circle,” appears on the display.
5. To release the cursor, press the CURSOR FLOAT soft key. (The solid circle
changes to a dashed one.) To relocate the zoom circle, select location with
the cursor pad, then press the CURSOR LOCK key.
6. To quit the zoom function, press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select OFF.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
ZOOM &
D. BOX
ZOOM
ON /OFF
Zoom circle
CURSOR
FLOAT
ARP
TGT ZM
D. BOX
ON/OFF
Zoom window
RETURN
+
Requires optional
ARP Board in
1800/1900 series
network radar.
Not shown when
radar source is
otherwise.
001.0°R
0.190nm
Zoom
3.15.2
Zooming in on ARP, TTM targets
You may zoom in on TTM (Tracked Target Message) and ARP targets. TTM
targets can come from a NavNet connected radar, or from other ARP radar that
is outputting the TTM message. (TTM is a NMEA 0183 data sentence that is an
available output from some ARP capable radar.) Target numbers must be turned
on to use this function. This can be done by enabling the target ID number
option in the ARP SETUP menu.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
Press the ZOOM/D.BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D.BOX soft keys.
Press the ZOOM soft key to select ZOOM ON.
Press the ARP TGT ZM soft key.
3-19
3. RADAR OPERATION
SELECT TARGET NO.
▲
1
▼
Target no. selection window
5. Use the [ENTER] knob to select number (1-10), then push the [ENTER] knob.
If the target does not exist several beeps sound and the zoom function is
cancelled.
To cancel, press the CURSOR LOCK soft key.
Note: The zoom window blends in with the background when the background
color for the radar picture is white. If the window is difficult to see, change
the background color.
3.16
Shifting the Picture
Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced manually or automatically
to expand the view field without switching to a larger scale.
3.16.1
Manual shift
The sweep origin can be shifted in any presentation mode to a point specified by
the cursor by up to 60% of the range in use in any direction.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Locate the cursor anywhere within the effective radius of the display.
If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
Press the SHIFT soft key.
Press the MANUAL soft key to shift. The heading line shifts to the cursor
location. SHIFT appears at right-hand corner of the display.
6. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
7. To cancel shift, press the RADAR DISPLY, SHIFT and OFF soft keys in that
order.
SHIFT
Cursor
Place cursor
where desired.
Press the MANUAL soft key.
Shifting the picture manually
3-20
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.16.2
Automatic shift
The amount of automatic shift is calculated with speed, and the amount of shift is
limited to 60% of the range in use. For example, if you set the shift speed setting
for 15 knots and the ship is running at 10 knots, the amount of shift will be 40%.
The formula for determining shift amount is as shown below.
Ship's speed
X 0.6 = Amount of shift(%)
Shift speed setting
Automatic shift mode is only available in the head-up mode.
Setting automatic shift maximum speed
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
Press the SHIFT soft key to show the shift soft keys.
Press the AUTO S.SPD soft key to display the auto ship speed setting
window.
AUTO SHIP SPEED
15
Auto ship speed setting window
5. Adjust the cursor pad or [ENTER] knob to set the maximum speed of your
vessel, and then push the [ENTER] knob or the ENTER soft key to set. The
setting range is 1-999 kt and the default setting is 15 kt.
Automatic shift
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the [HIDE/SHOW] soft key to show the radar soft keys if not displayed.
Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
Press the SHIFT soft key followed by the AUTO key to shift the sweep origin.
Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
To cancel shift, press the RADAR DISPLY, SHIFT and OFF soft keys in that
order.
3-21
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.17
Using the Offset EBL
The offset EBL can be used to predict a potential collision course. It can also be
used to measure the range and bearing between two targets.
3.17.1
Predicting collision course
The procedure below may be used to check if a radar target is on a potential
collision course with your vessel.
1. Press the [EBL/VRM] key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Press the EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
3. Press the OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position
and an “X” appears at the cursor position.
4. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor on the radar target which looks like it
might be on a collision course with own ship.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to fix the origin position.
6. After waiting for a few minutes (at least three minutes), rotate the [ENTER]
knob so the EBL bisects the target at the new position. If the target tracks
along the EBL towards the center of the display (your ship’s position), the
target may be on a collision course with your vessel.
7. To cancel the offset EBL, press the OFFSET soft key.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
Target tracked
here
OFFSET
Initial target
position
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
EBL1
VRM1
45.0°R
-.---nm
+
359.9°R
.0.240nm
Predicting collision course with the offset EBL
3-22
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.17.2
Measuring range & bearing between two targets
The procedure which follows shows how to measure the range and bearing
between two targets, using the targets “A” and “B” in the figure below as an
example.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the target “A.”
Press the [EBL/VRM] key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
Press the EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
Press the OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 and VRM1 moves to the
cursor position, which is marked with an “X.”
Rotate the [ENTER] knob so the EBL bisects the target “B.”
Push the [ENTER] knob, then press the VRM1 ON soft key.
Rotate the [ENTER] knob to place the VRM1 on the inner edge of the target
“B.”
Look at the indications for VRM1 and EBL1 to find the range and bearing
between the two targets.
To cancel the offset EBL, press the OFFSET key.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
EBL
VRM
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
Target B
OFFSET
Target A
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
Bearing and range
between target A
and target B
EBL1
VRM1
45.0°R
0.125nm
+ 359.9°R
0.240nm
Measuring range and bearing between two targets
3-23
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.18
Echo Trails
Echo trails are simulated afterglow of target echoes that represent their
movements relative to own ship. This function is useful for alerting you past
possible collision situations.
Echo trail
Sample echo trails
3.18.1
Trail time
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET soft key.
3. Press the TRAIL soft key.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
TRAIL
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
TRAIL
TRAIL
ON /OFF
TRAIL
ON /OFF
TRAIL
TIME
TRAIL
TIME
GRAD
SINGLE
BRILL
HIGH
HIGH
TRAIL
COLOR
RETURN
RETURN
+ 359.9°R
+ 359.9°R
0.24nm
0.24nm
GD-1700C/1710C
GD-1700
Trail soft keys
4. Press the TRAIL TIME soft key to show the trail time window.
TRAIL TIME
▲
¤ 15 seconds
¡ 30 seconds
¡ 1 minute
¡ 3 minutes
¡ 6 minutes
¡ 15 minutes
¡ 30 minutes
¡ CONTINUOUS
▼
Trail time window
3-24
3. RADAR OPERATION
5. Use the cursor pad to select time desired.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
3.18.2
Starting echo trails
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
Press the TARGET and TRAIL soft keys.
Press the TRAIL ON/OFF to select ON.
Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
“TRAIL,” the echo trail time selected and elapsed time appear at the top
right-hand corner of the display. Then, afterglow starts extending from all targets.
Trails are restarted when the range or mode is changed, and zoom or shift is
turned on.
For continuous trails, the maximum continuous trail time is 99 minutes and 59
seconds. When the elapsed time clock counts up to that time, the elapsed time
display resets to zero and trails begin again.
To turn off echo trail, press the TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select OFF at step 3 in
the above procedure.
Note: No echo trails are shown where a tx sector blanking area is set.
3.18.3
Trail brilliance (GD-1700)
Trail brilliance can be selected to high or low as below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.18.4
If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
Press the TARGET and TRAIL soft keys.
Press the BRILL soft key to select HIGH or LOW.
Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
Trail gradation (GD-1700C/1710C)
The echo trails can be shown in single or multiple gradations. Multiple gradation
paints the trails thinner with time, like the afterglow on an analog PPI radar.
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET and TRAIL soft keys.
3. Press the GRAD soft key to select SINGLE or MULTI as appropriate.
Multitone
Monotone
Multitone and monotone trails
4. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
3-25
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.18.5
Trail color (GD-1700C/1710C)
The GD-1700C/1710C can show echo trails in blue, yellow, green or white.
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET, TRAIL and TRAIL COLOR soft keys.
TRAIL COLOR
▲
¤ BLUE
¡ YELLOW
¡ GREEN
¡ WHITE
▼
Trail color window
3. Use the cursor pad to select the color desired.
4. Press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
3-26
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.19
Echo Stretch
Normally, the reflected echoes from long range targets appear on the display as
weaker and smaller blips even though they are compensated by the radar’s
internal circuitry. The echo stretch function magnifies these small blips in all
ranges. Two types of echo stretch are available: ES LOW which stretches
echoes in bearing direction and ES HIGH which stretches them in both range
and bearing directions.
Target
Bearing
direction
Echo Stretch OFF
"LOW" Echo stretch
Range
direction
Bearing
direction
"HIGH" Echo stretch
Types of echo stretch
This function magnifies not only targets but also sea clutter and radar
interference. For this reason, be sure sea clutter and radar interference are
properly suppressed before activating the echo stretch.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
Press the E. STR soft key to select HIGH, LOW or OFF as appropriate.
Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
The display shows ES H (High) or ES L (Low) when the echo stretch is on.
3-27
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.20
Echo Averaging
The echo average feature, available with connection of a Model 1800/1900
series network radar, effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes received from
stable targets such as ships appear on the screen at almost the same position
during every rotation of the antenna. On the other hand, unstable echoes such
as sea clutter appear at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echo average performs
scan-to-scan correlation. Correlation is made by storing and averaging echo
signals over successive picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable, it is
presented in its normal intensity. Sea clutter is averaged over successive scans
resulting in the reduced brilliance, making it easier to discriminate real targets
from sea clutter.
To properly use the echo average function, it is recommended to first suppress
sea clutter with the A/C SEA control and then do the following:
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
3. Press the E. AVG soft key to select desired echo averaging.
OFF:
LOW:
No averaging
Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppresses brilliance
of unstable echoes.
MED: Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys.
HIGH: Stably displays distant targets.
The display shows EAV L, EAV M or EAV H when echo averaging is on.
(a) Echo average OFF
(b) Echo average ON
Effect of echo averaging
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
3-28
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.21
Outputting TLL Data
Target position data can be output to NavNet equipment and shown on their
plotter screens with the TTL mark ( X )
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Operate the cursor pad to place the cursor on the target whose position you
wish to output.
3. Press the TARGET soft key.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
TARGET
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
ACQ
TARGET
INFO
Requires ARP circuit board
in Model 1800/1900 series
NavNet radar. Not shown
otherwise.
RETURN
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
TARGET soft keys
4. Press the TLL OUTPUT soft key to output target position data. The TTL mark
appears on the plotter screen of the NavNet equipment at the target’s
position the moment the TLL OUTPUT soft key was pressed. Further, that
position is recorded as a waypoint on all NavNet units, under the youngest
empty waypoint number on each NavNet unit.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: The screen of the TLL recipient may be temporarily interrupted when
receiving TLL from another NavNet display unit. Press any key to restore
normal operation.
3-29
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.22
Guard Alarm
The guard alarm allows the operator to set the desired range and bearing for a
guard zone. When ships, islands, landmasses, etc. violate the guard zone, an
audio alarm sounds and the offending target blinks to call the operator’s
attention.
CAUTION
• The alarm should not be relied upon as
the sole means for detecting possible
collision situations.
• A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls
should be properly adjusted to be sure
the alarm system does not overlook
target echoes.
3.22.1
Setting a guard alarm zone
To set a guard alarm zone, set the radar to transmit and do the following:
1. Press the [ALARM] key.
2. Use the cursor pad to set the cursor on the top left corner (or top right corner)
of the guard zone you want to set, then press the SET GUARD1 or SET
GUARD2 soft key, depending on which guard zone you want to set.
3. Use the cursor pad to set the cursor on the bottom right corner (or top left
corner) of the guard zone area, then push the [ENTER] knob.
4. Press RETURN soft key to finish.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°M
ALARM
319.9°M
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
ALARM
GUARD 1
SET
GUARD1
SET
GUARD1
2
1
MOVE +CURSOR TO
ANOTHER CORNER OF
GUARD1 AND PUSH
KNOB TO SET.
+
SET
GUARD2
SET
GUARD2
RETURN
RETURN
317.2°R
0.230nm
(1) Drag cursor to top (or bottom) corner
for guard zone and press the SET
GUARD1 or SET GUARD2 soft key.
ENO ALARM
B
L T
V
R
M
.125n
.032nm
m
39.9°R
+0.230nm
(2) Drag cursor diagonally to bottom (or top)
corner for guard zone and press the [ENTER]
knob.
How to set a guard alarm zone
3-30
ERASE
GUARD1
3. RADAR OPERATION
The equipment then searches for targets inside the guard zone to determine
guard alarm type. If a target is found inside the guard zone, the guard zone type
becomes an “Outward guard alarm,” and any target exiting the guard zone will
trigger the audio alarm. If no target is found, the guard zone type becomes an
“Inward guard alarm,” and any targets entering the guard zone will trigger the
audio alarm. The guard alarm type is shown as G1(G2) IN or G1(G2) OUT.
Note 1: When the radar range is less than the guard zone range, “G1 (2) IN” or
“G1 (2) OUT” changes to “G1 (2) ***.” The guard alarm function is not
available while this indication appears.
Note 2: If the network radar is set to standby while the guard alarm is active, the
guard alarm is cancelled. The guard alarm is redisplayed when the
radar is set to transmit again.
3.22.2
When the alarm is violated…
Any radar target violating the guard zone will flash, the audio alarm sounds, and
the alarm icon appears (in red on the color model). Additionally the message
“TARGET ENTERED INTO GUARD1(GUARD2)” or “TARGET LEFT FROM
GUARD1(GUARD2)” is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Press the
[CLEAR] key to silence the alarm. When this is done, the color of speaker icon
on the color model changes to background color and “G1(G2) ACK” replaces
G1(G2) IN(OUT) at the top right corner of the display. This means the alarm is
temporarily deactivated. To reactivate the alarm, press the SET GUARD1 or SET
GUARD2 soft key as appropriate.
3.22.3
Cancelling the guard alarm
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Press the ERASE GUARD1 or ERASE GUARD2 soft key as appropriate.
3. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
3-31
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.23
Watchman
3.23.1
How watchman works
The watchman function periodically transmits radar pulses for one minute to
check for targets in a guard zone. If a target is found in the zone, watchman is
cancelled, the audio alarm sounds and the radar continues transmitting. If no
target is found the radar goes into standby for the number of minutes set on the
RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. This feature is useful when you do not need
the radar’s function continuously but want to be alerted to radar targets in a
specific area. “WTCH” appears at the top left corner when Watchman is active.
Tx
1 min
Watchman
starts
ST-BY
*
Tx
1 min
5,10
or
20 min
ST-BY
*
5,10
or
20 min
* Beeps emitted just before radar transmits.
How watchman works
3.23.2
Turning on/off watchman
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set a guard zone. See the paragraph 3.22.)
If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
Press the NAV FUNC soft key.
Press the W. MAN ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
Press RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: When the watchman is activated and no guard zone is active, the
message “PLEASE SET GUARD ZONE. PUSH ANY KEY TO
CONTINUE.” appears. Press any key, then set a guard zone.
3.23.3
Setting watchman stand-by interval
The watchman standby period interval, that is, the number of minutes the radar
is in standby, can be set to 5, 10 or 20 minutes as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select WATCHMAN TIME, then press the EDIT soft key.
WATCHMAN TIME
¤
¡
¡
5 minutes
10 minutes
20 minutes
Watchman window
4. Select time desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-32
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.24
Waypoint Marker
A waypoint marker, showing the location of the destination waypoint set on the
plotter, may be inscribed on the radar display.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
Waypoint
marker
319.9°M
NAV
+
W. MAN
ON/OFF
FUNC
WPT MK
ON /OFF
RETURN
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
Waypoint marker
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
Press the NAV FUNC soft key.
Press the WPT MK ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
3-33
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.25
ARP, TTM Operation
With an ARP-equipped Model 1800/1900 series network radar as the radar
source, you can manually and automatically acquire and track ten targets. Once
a target is acquired automatically or manually it is automatically tracked within
0.1 to 32 nm. If the FURUNO heading sensor PG-1000 is used, the data
sentence “RMC” is necessary.
Alternatively, you can display the tracks of other ships by receiving the data
sentence TTM (Tracked Target Message) via the NETWORK or NMEA port.
However, targets cannot be acquired.
Usage precautions for ARP
WARNING
No one navigational aid should be relied
upon for the safety of vessel and crew.
The navigator has the responsibility to
check all aids available to confirm
position. Electronic aids are not
a substitute for basic navigational
principles and common sense.
• This auto plotter automatically tracks an
automatically or manually acquired radar
target and calculates its course and
speed, indicating them by a vector. Since
the data generated by the auto plotter
are based on what radar targets are
selected, the radar must always be
optimally tuned for use with the auto
plotter, to ensure required targets will not
be lost or unwanted targets such as sea
returns and noise will not be acquired
and tracked.
• A target does not always mean a landmass, reef, ships or other surface vessels
but can imply returns from sea surface
and clutter. As the level of clutter changes
with environment, the operator should
properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN
and GAIN controls to be sure target
echoes are not eliminated from the
radar screen.
3-34
CAUTION
The plotting accuracy and response of
this auto plotter meets IMO standards.
Tracking accuracy is affected by the
following:
• Tracking accuracy is affected by course
change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
abrupt course change. (The actual
amount depends on gyrocompass
specifications.)
• The amount of tracking delay is inversely
proportional to the relative speed of the
target. Delay is on the order of 15-30
seconds for high relative speed; 30-60
seconds for low relative speed.
Display accuracy is affected by the
following:
• Echo intensity
• Radar transmission pulsewidth
• Radar bearing error
• Gyrocompass error
• Course change (own ship or target)
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.25.1
Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP
SETUP menu.
ARP TARGET INFO
INTERNAL ARP
CANCEL ALL TARGETS
NO
ARP VECTOR MODE
TRUE
ARP VECTOR TIME
30 minutes
HISTORY INTERVAL
OFF
CPA
OFF
TCPA
30 seconds
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA
OFF
TARGET ID NUMBER
OFF
ARP
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
ARP setup menu
2. Select ARP TARGET INFO, then press the EDIT soft key to show the ARP
target info window.
ARP TARGET INFO
▲
¤ INTERNAL ARP
¡ EXTERNAL ARP
¡ OFF
▼
ARP target info window
3. Select INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP or OFF as appropriate.
INTERNAL ARP: The radar source must be an ARP-equipped Model
1800/1900 series NavNet radar. Select this item also for a NavNet unit being
fed ARP targets.
EXTERNAL ARP: Receive TTM data sentence via NMEA or NETWORK port.
Target tracks are shown but targets cannot be acquired.
OFF: Turns off the ARP or TTM display.
4. Press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-35
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.25.2
Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP)
Ten targets may be acquired and tracked manually and automatically. When you
attempt to acquire an eleventh target, the message “ARP FULL – ALREADY
TRACKING 10 TARGETS!” appears for five seconds. To acquire another target,
terminate tracking of an unnecessary target as shown in the paragraph 3.25.4.
Manual acquisition
When the automatic acquisition (AUTO ACQ. AREA) is set to on, up to five
targets may be acquired manually. If you attempt to acquire a sixth target, the
alert message appears.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
Press the TARGET soft key.
Place the cursor on the target to acquire, then press the ACQ soft key.
Press the RETURN soft key.
The plot symbol changes over time as below. A vector appears about one minute
after acquisition, indicating the target’s motion trend.
Vector
01*
01*
At acquisition
1 min. after
acquisition
01*
3 min. after
acquisition
Target Number
* = Target number shown when TARGET ID NUMBER is
turned on in the ARP SETUP menu.
ARP plot symbols
Note: In case of the acquisition by an external ARP, the acquisition circle mark
appears one minute after acquisition.
Automatic acquisition
The ARP can acquire up to ten targets automatically by setting an automatic
acquisition area. When automatic acquisition is selected after acquiring targets
manually, only the remaining capacity for targets may be automatically acquired.
For example, if seven targets have been manually acquired, three targets may
be automatically acquired.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.
Press the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP menu.
Operate the cursor pad to select AUTO ACQUISITION AREA.
Press the EDIT soft key to show the automatic acquisition area window.
AUTO ACQ. AREA
▲
ON
OFF
▼
Automatic acquisition area window
5. Select ON.
6. Press the ENTER soft key.
3-36
3. RADAR OPERATION
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu. An acquisition area of 2.0 to 2.5
miles in range and ±45º on either side of the heading line in bearing appears.
Note: Targets being tracked in automatic acquisition are continuously
tracked when switching to manual acquisition.
Automatic acquisition area
45° starboard
45° port
2.0 - 2.5 nm
Automatic acquisition area
3.25.3
Displaying target number (ARP, TTM)
Target number can be shown for ARP and TTM targets as below.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°T
TARGET
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
01
ACQ
ARP
Target
Number
TARGET
INFO
RETURN
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
ARP target number
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the ARP SETUP soft key.
Select TARGET ID NUMBER.
Press the EDIT soft key.
Select ON or OFF (default setting) as appropriate.
Press the ENTER soft key.
Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-37
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.25.4
Terminating tracking of ARP targets
When ten targets have been acquired, no more acquisition occurs unless targets
are cancelled. If you need to acquire additional targets, you must first cancel one
or more individual targets, or all targets, using one of the procedures below.
Terminating tracking of selected targets
1. Place the cursor on the target to terminate tracking.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key to terminate tracking and erase the target.
Terminating tracking of all targets
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Select CANCEL ALL TARGETS.
3. Press the EDIT soft key.
CANCEL ALL TARGETS
▲
¡ YES
¤ NO
▼
Cancel all targets window
4. Select YES.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-38
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.25.5
Setting vector attributes (ARP)
What is a vector?
A vector is a line extending from a tracked target which shows estimated speed
and course of the target. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target
after the selected vector time elapses. It can be useful to extend the vector
length (time) in order to evaluate the risk of collision with any target.
Vector
Vector
Vector reference, vector time
You may reference the vectors to North (True, requires heading and speed data)
or ship’s heading (relative) as desired. Vector time can be set to 30 seconds, 1,
3, 6, 15 or 30 minutes.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP
SETUP menu.
2. Operate the cursor pad to select ARP VECTOR MODE.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector mode window.
ARP VECTOR MODE
¤
¡
RELATIVE
TRUE
Vector mode window
4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Select ARP VECTOR TIME, then press the EDIT soft key to show the ARP
vector time window.
ARP VECTOR TIME
▲
¤ 30 seconds
¡ 1 minute
¡ 3 minutes
¡ 6 minutes
¡ 15 minutes
¡ 30 minutes
▼
Vector time window
7. Operate the cursor pad to select vector time among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6
min, 15 min and 30 min.
8. Press the ENTER soft key.
9. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-39
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.25.6
Displaying past position display (ARP)
This ARP can display time-spaced dots (maximum ten dots) marking the past
positions of any targets being tracked. You can evaluate a target’s actions by the
spacing between dots. Below are examples of dot spacing and target movement.
(a) Ship turning
(b) Ship running
straight
(c) Ship reduced
speed
(d) Ship increased
speed
Past position displays
To turn the past position display on or off:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Operate the cursor pad to select HISTORY INTERVAL.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the history interval window.
HISTORY INTERVAL
▲
¤ OFF
¡ 30 seconds
¡ 1 minute
¡ 3 minutes
¡ 6 minutes
▼
History interval window
4. Operate the cursor pad to select plotting interval among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min
and 6 min, or select OFF to turn off the past position display.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3-40
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.25.7
ARP, TTM target data
You can show motion trends (range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and TCPA) for
ARP or TTM targets. Note that TARGET ID NUMBER, in the ARP SETUP menu,
must be turned on to display this data.
1. Place the cursor on the target you want to see its data.
2. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to display the radar soft keys.
3. Press the TARGET and TARGET INFO soft keys. The data of the selected
target appears. (If an EBL/VRM data box is displayed ARP data will be under
it.)
4. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
5. To erase the ARP/TTM data box, select corresponding target number with
the cursor, then press the [CLEAR] key.
.250/SP.125nm
H-UP
319.9°T
TARGET
+
TRAIL
Cursor
ARP
Target
TLL
OUTPUT
ACQ
01
TARGET
INFO
RETURN
No.01 VECTOR TRUE 15min
CSE 359.9°T SPD 12.5kt
CPA 2.21nm TCPA 12:35
+
359.9°R
0.240nm
CPA and TCPA
Course and Speed
Target No., Vector Reference (True), Vector Time
ARP target data
3-41
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.25.8
CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP)
When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm
range or its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, an audio alarm
sounds and the speaker icon (red on the color model) appears. In addition, the
target plot symbol of the offending target changes to a triangle and flashes
together with its vector. You may silence the audio alarm with the [CLEAR] key.
Press the [ALARM] key and the message “COLLISION ALARM” appears. Press
the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm. The flashing of the
triangle plot symbol continues until you intentionally terminate tracking of the
target. The ARP continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point
of Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each track to own ship.
This feature helps alert you to targets which may be on a collision course with
own ship. However, it is important that gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar
controls are properly adjusted and the ARP is set up so that it can track targets
effectively.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the
size, tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
CAUTION
The CPA/TCPA alarm should never be
relied upon as the sole means for detecting the risk of collision. The navigator is
not relieved of the responsibility to keep
visual lookout for avoiding collisions,
whether or not the radar or other plotting
aid is in use.
Follow the steps shown below to set the CPA/TCPA alarm range:
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Operate the cursor pad to select CPA.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the CPA window.
CPA
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
▼
OFF
0.5nm
1nm
2nm
3nm
5nm
6nm
CPA window
4.
5.
6.
7.
3-42
Select a CPA limit with the cursor pad.
Press the ENTER soft key. The ARP SETUP menu reappears.
Press the cursor pad to select TCPA.
Press the EDIT soft key to show the TCPA window.
3. RADAR OPERATION
TCPA
▲
¤
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
▼
30 seconds
1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes
4 minutes
5 minutes
6 minutes
12 minutes
TCPA window
8. Select a TCPA limit with the cursor pad.
9. Press the ENTER soft key.
10. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
3.25.9
Lost target alarm (ARP)
When the system detects a lost target, the target symbol becomes a diamond
and tracking is discontinued after one minute. The normal plotting symbol is
restored to the target when the target is manually acquired.
01
Lost target mark
Canceling a lost target
1. Place the cursor on the target.
2. Press the [CLEAR] key.
3-43
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.26
Interpreting the Radar Display
3.26.1
General
Minimum and maximum ranges
Minimum range
The minimum range is defined by the shortest distance at which, using a scale of
1.5 or 0.75 nm, a target having an echoing area of 10 m2 is still shown separate
from the point representing the antenna position. It is mainly dependent on the
pulselength, antenna height, and signal processing such as main bang
suppression and digital quantization. It is best to use the shortest possible range
as long as the clarity and definition of the picture remain good.
Maximum range
The maximum detecting range of the radar, Rmax, varies considerably
depending on several factors such as the height of the antenna above the
waterline, the height of the target above the sea, the size, shape and material of
the target, and atmospheric conditions.
Under normal atmospheric conditions, the maximum range is equal to the radar
horizon or a little shorter. The radar horizon is longer than the optical one by
about 6% because of the diffraction property of the radar signal. Rmax is given
in the following equation.
Rmax = 2.2 x ( h1 + h2 )
where
Rmax: radar horizon (nautical miles)
h1:
antenna height (m)
h2:
target height (m)
Radar horizon
Optical horizon
Radar horizon
For example, if the height of the antenna above the waterline is 9 meters and the
height of the target is 16 meters, the maximum radar range is;
Rmax= 2.2 x ( 9 + 16 ) = 2.2 x (3 + 4) = 15.4 nm
It should be noted that the detection range is reduced by precipitation (which
absorbs the radar signal).
3-44
3. RADAR OPERATION
Radar resolution
There are two important factors in radar resolution (discrimination): bearing
resolution and range resolution.
Bearing resolution
Bearing resolution is the ability of the radar to display the echoes received from
two targets, which are at the same range and close together, as separate targets.
Bearing resolution is directly proportional to the antenna length, and inversely
proportional to the radar's wavelength.
Range resolution
Range resolution is the ability to display the echoes received from two targets,
which are on the same bearing and close to each other, as separate targets.
Bearing accuracy
One of the most important features of the radar is how accurately the bearing of
a target can be measured. The accuracy of bearing measurement basically
depends on the narrowness of the radar beam. However, the bearing is usually
taken relative to the ship’s heading, and thus, proper adjustment of the heading
marker at installation is an important factor in ensuring bearing accuracy. To
minimize error when measuring the bearing of a target, select a range which will
put the target as far out to the edge of the radar screen as possible.
Range measurement
Measurement of the range to a target is also a very important function of the
radar. There are three means of measuring range: the fixed range rings, the
cursor and the variable range marker (VRM). The fixed range rings appear on
the screen with a predetermined interval and provide a rough estimate of the
range to a target. The cursor pad is operated to place the cursor on the leading
edge of the target. Range and bearing to the target is shown at the bottom
right-hand corner of the display. The variable range marker’s diameter is
increased or decreased so that the marker touches the inner edge of the target,
allowing the operator to obtain more accurate range measurements.
3-45
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.26.2
False echoes
Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no
target or disappear even if there are targets. False target situations may be
recognized, however, if you understand why they are displayed. Typical false
echoes are shown below.
Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted pulse returns from a solid object like a
large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A second, a third or more echoes may be
observed on the display at double, triple or other multiples of the actual range of
the target as shown below. Multiple reflection echoes can be reduced and often
removed by decreasing the gain (sensitivity) or properly adjusting the [A/C SEA]
control.
True
echo
Target
Own ship
Multiple
echo
Multiple echoes
Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted, some radiation escapes on each side
of the beam. This stray RF is called a “sidelobe.” If a target exists where it can
be detected by the sidelobes as well as the main lobe, the side echoes may be
represented on both sides of the true echo at the same range. Sidelobes show
usually only on short ranges and from strong targets. They can be reduced
through careful reduction of the gain or proper adjustment of the A/C SEA
control.
Target A
Target B
(Spurious) Target B
(True)
Sidelobe echoes
3-46
3. RADAR OPERATION
Virtual image
A relatively large target close to your ship may show at two positions on the
screen. One of them is the true echo directly reflected by the target and the other
is a false echo which is caused by the mirror effect of a large object on or close
to your ship as shown in the figure below. If your ship comes close to a large
metal bridge, for example, such a false echo may temporarily be seen on the
screen.
Target ship
;;
;;
;;;;;
;;
;;;
;;
;;;;
;
;;
;;
;;
;;
Own
ship
;;;
;;
;
;;;
;;
;;;;
;;
;;
;;
;;;
; True
;;; echo
;;
;;
Mirror image
of target ship
False
echo
Virtual image
Shadow sectors
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the antenna block the radar
beam. If the angle subtended at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a
non-detecting sector or blind spot may be produced. Within this sector, targets
can not be detected.
Radar
antenna
Radar
mast
Shadow sector
Shadow sectors
3-47
3. RADAR OPERATION
3.26.3
SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)
A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3
cm) radar within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received
causes it to transmit a response which is swept repetitively across the complete
radar frequency band. When interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 µs) through
the band before beginning a relatively slow sweep (7.5 µs) through the band
back to the starting frequency. This process is repeated for a total of twelve
complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART frequency will match
that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar receiver.
If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow
sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots
equally spaced by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.
When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display may
show also the 12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional
dot responses, which also are equally spaced by 0.64 nm, will be interspersed
with the original line of 12 dots. They will appear slightly weaker and smaller
than the original dots.
Screen B: When SART
is close
Screen A: When SART
is distant
Lines of 12 dots
are displayed in
concentric arcs.
Echo from SART
Radar antenna
beamwidth
24 NM
Echo from
SART
1.5 NM
Position of
SART
Own ship
position
9500 MHz
9200 MHz
Own ship
position
SART mark
length
7.5 µs
Sweep time
Radar receiver
bandwidth
95 µs
Low speed sweep signal
Sweep start
High speed sweep signal
Appearance of SART signal on the radar display
3-48
Position of
SART
3. RADAR OPERATION
General procedure for detecting SART response
1. Use the range scale of 6 or 12 nm as the spacing between the SART
responses is about 0.6 nm (1125 m) to distinguish the SART.
2. Turn off the automatic clutter suppression (if applicable).
3. Turn off the Interference Rejector.
General remarks on receiving SART
SART range errors
When responses from only the 12 low frequency sweeps are visible (when the
SART is at a range greater than about 1 nm), the position at which the first dot is
displayed may be as much as 0.64 nm beyond the true position of the SART.
When the range closes so that the fast sweep responses are seen also, the first
of these will be no more than 150 meters beyond the true position.
Radar bandwidth
This is normally matched to the radar pulselength and is usually switched with
the range scale and the associated pulselength. Narrow bandwidths of 3-5 MHz
are used with long pulses on long range and wide bandwidths of 10-25 MHz with
short pulses on short ranges.
Any radar bandwidth of less than 5 MHz will attenuate the SART signal slightly,
so it is preferable to use a medium bandwidth to ensure optimum detection of
the SART.
Radar sidelobes
As the SART is approached, sidelobes from the radar antenna may show the
SART responses as a series of arcs or concentric rings. These can be removed
by the use of the [A/C SEA] control although it may be operationally useful to
observe the sidelobes as they may be easier to detect in clutter conditions and
also they will confirm that the SART is near to the ship.
Gain
For maximum range SART detection the normal gain setting for long range
detection should be used, that is, with background noise speckle visible.
3-49
3. RADAR OPERATION
A/C SEA control
For optimum range SART detection, this control should be set to the minimum.
Care should be exercised as wanted target in sea clutter may be obscured. Note
also that in clutter conditions the first few dots of the SART response may not be
detectable, irrespective of the setting of the anti-clutter sea control. In this case,
the position of the SART may be estimated by measuring 9.5 nm from the
furthest dot back towards own ship.
Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter sea control facilities in which case
the operator should switch to manual.
A/C RAIN control
This should be used normally (to break up areas of rain) when trying to detect a
SART response which, being a series of dots, is not affected by the action of the
anti-clutter rain circuitry. Note that racon responses, which are often in the form
of a long flash, will be affected by the use of this control.
Some sets have automatic/manual anti-clutter rain control facilities in which case
the operator should switch to manual.
Note: This SART information is excerpted from IMO SN/Circ 197 Operation of
Marine Radar for SART Detection.
3.26.4
Racon (Radar Beacon)
A racon is a radar transponder which emits a characteristic signal when triggered
by a ship’s radar (usually only the 3 centimeter band). The signal may be emitted
on the same frequency as that of the triggering radar, in which case it is
superimposed on the ship's radar display automatically.
The racon signal appears on the PPI as a radial line originating at a point just
beyond the position of the radar beacon or as a Morse code signal (see figure
below) displayed radially from just beyond the beacon.
Racon
Appearance of racon signal on the radar display
3-50
4.
VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
With connection of the optional network sounder you can show video sounder
images on the display.
4.1
Principle of Operation
The video sounder determines the distance between its transducer and
underwater objects such as fish, lake bottom or seabed and displays the results
on screen. It does this by utilizing the fact that an ultrasonic wave transmitted
through water travels at a nearly constant speed of 4800 feet (1500 meters) per
second. When a sound wave strikes an underwater object such as fish or sea
bottom, part of the sound wave is reflected back toward the source (transducer).
Thus by calculating the time difference between the transmission of a sound
wave and the reception of the reflected sound wave, the depth to the object can
be determined.
The entire process begins in the network sounder. Transmitter power is sent to
the transducer as a short pulse of electrical energy. The electrical signal
produced by the transmitter is converted into an ultrasonic signal by the
transducer and transmitted into the water. Any returning signals from intervening
objects (such as a fish school) are received by the transducer and converted into
an electrical signal. The signals are then amplified in the amplifier section, and
finally, displayed on screen.
The picture displayed is made up of a series of vertical scan lines, one for each
transmission. Each line represents a snapshot of what has occurred beneath the
boat. A series of snapshots are accumulated side by side across the screen, and
the resulting contours of the bottom and fish between the bottom and surface
are displayed.
0
50
100
-
Underwater conditions and video sounder display
4-1
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.2
Sounder Displays
4.2.1
Selecting a sounder display
There are seven display modes from which to choose: dual frequency, single
frequency, marker zoom, bottom zoom, bottom lock, bottom discrimination, and
A-scope
To select a display;
1. Press the [DISP] key and select a sounder display.
2. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the sounder soft keys.
3. Press the DISPLY MODE soft key to show the display mode window.
DISPLAY MODE
¡ DUAL FREQ
¤ SINGLE FREQ
¡ MARKER ZOOM
¡ BOTTOM ZOOM
¡ BOTTOM LOCK
¡ BOTTOM DSCRM
HF: 200.0 kHz
LF: 50.0 kHz
Display mode window
4. Use the cursor pad to select a display.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.
Note: On menus which show the RETURN soft key you may use it or the
ENTER knob to register setting and close the window.
4-2
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.2.2
Description of sounder displays
Single frequency display
Display mode
Variable Range Marker (white)
Depth scale
Minute marker
0'30"
Zero line
Icons
(alarm, battery,
simulation)
0
S
I
SOUNDER
SINGLE
M
F
SHIFT
50
Color bar
40
Temp.
scale
(orange)
52
Fish
echo
50
Cross-hair
cursor
100
30
AUTO/
D. BOX
FREQ
LF /HF
DISPLY
MODE
Water
temp.
graph
Water
temp.
display
Soft keys
Time
150
114
LF
Tx frequency
200
Bottom echo
Depth
Indications on the single frequency display
Note 1: The water temperature display requires an appropriate water
temperature sensor. It can be turned on or off with TEMPERATURE
GRAPH on the SOUNDER menu.
Note 2: When using the vertically split plotter/sounder display with dual
frequency or zoom display, the depth scale for the left sounder screen is
not displayed. Further, a last digit on the depth may be overlapped by
the line which splits screens.
Selecting transmission frequency
The single frequency display shows either the LF (low frequency) picture or HF
(high frequency) picture. To select transmission frequency, press the FREQ
LF/HF soft key to select “LF” or “HF”.
4-3
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Dual-frequency display
The dual-frequency display provides both HF and LF pictures. This display is
useful for comparing the same picture with two different sounding frequencies.
0.0
LF
HF
Dual-frequency display
LF picture
The sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to detect bottom conditions. The lower the
frequency of the pulse, the wider the detection area. Therefore, the low
frequency is useful for general detection and judging bottom condition.
HF picture
The higher the frequency of the ultrasonic pulse the better the resolution.
Therefore, the high frequency is ideal for detailed observation of fish school.
low frequency
high frequency
Sounding area and transmission frequency
4-4
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Marker-zoom display
The marker-zoom display expands a selected area of the normal sounder picture
to full vertical size of the screen on the left-half window. You may specify the
portion to expand by operating the VRM (Variable Range Marker), which you can
shift with the [ENTER] knob. The area between the VRM and zoom marker is
expanded. The length of the segment is equal to one division of the depth scale.
Fish school
0'20"
0
42
Fish
school
44
42.0
-
50
46
48
50
80
100
HF
MARKER-ZOOM
DISPLAY
-
VRM
(White on color model)
This part
is zoomed.
Zoom marker
NORMAL
DISPLAY
Marker-zoom display plus normal sounder display
Bottom-zoom display
The bottom-zoom display expands bottom and bottom fish echoes by the zoom
range selected on the sounder range setup menu (see paragraph 5.9.3). A
bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a soft, sandy bottom.
A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
0
40
50
Bottom
60
80
BOTTOM-ZOOM
DISPLAY
-
20.0
50
100
HF
-
Zoom marker
NORMAL DISPLAY
Bottom-zoom display plus normal sounder display
4-5
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides a compressed normal picture on the right half
of the screen and a 3 or 6 meter (10 or 20 feet) wide layer in contact with the
bottom is expanded onto the left half of the screen. This mode is useful for
discriminating bottom fish from the bottom echo. You may select the bottom lock
range from the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP menu. For details, see paragraph
5.9.3.
0
20
-
This part
is zoomed.
15
50
60
-
Fish
school
1010
-
80
5
BOTTOM-LOCK
DISPLAY
100
HF
-
Zoom marker
NORMAL DISPLAY
Bottom-lock display plus normal sounder display
Bottom discrimination display
The bottom discrimination mode displays the bottom echo to help you determine
bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a
soft, sandy bottom. A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
4
2
-
Bottom trail
Long tail=Hard bottom
Short tail=Soft bottom
0
20.0
50
-
0
80
50
-
100
HF
-
BOTTOM
NORMAL DISPLAY
DISCRIMINATION
DISPLAY
Bottom discrimination display
4-6
Zoom marker
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
A-scope display (display only)
The A-scope display, available in all modes, shows echoes at each transmission
with amplitudes and tone proportional to their intensities, on the right of the
screen. It is useful for estimating fish species and seabed composition. To turn
on the A-scope display, press the DISPLAY MODE soft key, select display mode
desired, then press the A-SCPE soft key to turn the A-scope display on or off as
appropriate. For the mode except SINGLE MODE the screen must be split
horizontally to show the A-scope presentation.
0
50
100
84
HF
-
SINGLE FREQ DISPLAY
A-scope Display
No response
Weak echo (fish)
Strong echo (bottom)
A-SCOPE
DISPLAY
A-scope display
4.2.3
Selecting screen split method in combination displays
On combination sounder displays you can split the screen vertically or
horizontally, using the SPLIT soft key as below.
0.0
0.0
SPLIT
/
HF
SPLIT
/
LF
HF
LF
How to use the SPLIT soft key (example: dual frequency display)
4-7
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.3
Automatic Sounder Operation
Automatic sounder operation is useful when you are preoccupied with other
tasks and do not have the time to adjust the display.
4.3.1
How the automatic sounder works
The automatic sounder function automatically selects the proper gain, range
scale and clutter suppression level according to depth. It works as follows:
• Range changes automatically to locate the bottom on the lower half of screen.
The range jumps to one step shallower range when bottom echoes reach a
half way point of the full scale from top and to one step deeper range when
they come to the lower edge of the scale.
• The gain is automatically adjusted to display the bottom echo in reddish brown
(default color arrangement).
• Clutter, which suppresses low level noise, is automatically adjusted.
4.3.2
Types of automatic sounder modes
Two types of automatic sounder modes are available: CRUISING and FISHING.
CRUISING is for tracking the bottom, and FISHING is for searching fish schools.
CRUISING uses a higher clutter rejection setting than FISHING therefore it is not
recommended for fish detection - weak fish echoes may be erased by the clutter
suppression circuit.
4.3.3
How to enable automatic sounder operation
1. If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the sounder soft keys.
2. Press the AUTO/D. BOX soft key.
AUTO MODE
▲
¤ CRUISING
¡ FISHING
¡ OFF (MANUAL)
▼
Auto mode window
3. Use the cursor pad to select CRUISING or FISHING as appropriate.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.
4-8
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.4
Manual Sounder Operation
Manual operation is useful for observing fish schools and bottom using fixed gain
setting.
The gain, range and range shifting functions used together give you the means
to select the depth you can see on screen.
4.4.1
Selecting the manual mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
4.4.2
If not displayed, press the [HIDE/SHOW] key to show the sounder soft keys.
Press the AUTO/D. BOX soft key to show the auto mode window.
Select OFF (MANUAL).
Press the RETURN soft key.
Selecting display range
Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key to select a range. The default ranges in
feet, meters, fathoms and passi/braza are as below. Note that range cannot be
changed in the automatic sounder mode.
Default sounder ranges
4.4.3
Range 1
Range 2
Range 3 Range 4
Range 5
Range 6
Range 7
15 ft
30 ft
60 ft
5m
10 m
3 fa
3 PB
Range 8
120 ft
200 ft
400 ft
1000 ft
1200 ft
1500 ft
20 m
40 m
80 m
150 m
300 m
4000 m
4500 m
5 fa
10 fa
20 fa
40 fa
80 fa
150 fa
650 fa
900 fa
5 PB
10 PB
30 PB
50 PB
100 PB
200 PB
700 P/B
900 P/B
Adjusting the gain
Normally, set the gain to the point where excessive noise does not appear on
screen. Use a higher gain setting for greater depths and a lower setting for
shallow waters.
Gain too high
Gain proper
Gain too low
Examples of proper and improper gain
4-9
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Press the [GAIN] key to show the gain window, and rotate the [ENTER] knob to
set the gain. Current level is shown on the bar. Press the RETURN key to finish.
The setting range is 0-100.
GAIN - HF
▲
27
HIGH
LOW
▼
Gain window
Note 1: On the dual-frequency display, the gain can be independently set for LF
and HF. Use the FREQ LF/HF soft key to select the frequency for which
to adjust gain.
Note 2: Gain cannot be adjusted in the automatic sounder mode. The message
“SOUNDER GAIN CANNOT BE CHANGED IN AUTO MODE” is
displayed when you attempt to do so.
4.4.4
Range shifting
The basic range can be thought of as providing a “window” into the water column
and range shifting as moving the “window” to the desired depth. The basic range
may be shifted up or down as desired by pressing the SHIFT soft key followed
by adjusting [+ RANGE -] key. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Shift
Shift concept
4-10
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.5
Measuring Depth, Time
The VRM functions to measure the depth, and the time cursor measures time.
1. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to shift the VRM; counterclockwise the shift it
downward, clockwise to shift it upward. You may also use the cursor pad to
shift the VRM, in which case use ▲ or ▼.
2. Use ◄ or ► on the cursor pad to shift the cross-hair cursor to measure the
elapsed time.
Time to cursor intersection
(Max. 99'59")
Depth to VRM
0'33"
0
28.8
Cross-hair
cursor
50
100
84
LF
-
VRM
How to use the VRM, time cursor
Note: If, when the range setting is over 1000 ft (m, fa, p/b), the VRM indication
and depth scale may overlap one another, shift the cross-hair cursor
slightly to show them completely. Further, when the display is shifted, the
depth scale may obscure the time indication.
4-11
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.6
Reducing Interference
Interference from other acoustic equipment operating nearby or other electronic
equipment on your boat may show itself on the display as shown below.
Interference from
other sounder
Electrical inteference
Types of interference
To reduce interference, do the following:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select NOISE LIMITER and press the EDIT soft key to show the noise limiter
window.
NOISE LIMITER
▲
¤ OFF
¡ LOW
¡ MEDIUM
¡ HIGH
▼
Noise limiter window
4. Use the cursor pad to select degree of suppression desired (LOW, MEDIUM,
HIGH) or turn the noise limiter off.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Turn the noise limiter function off when no interference exists, otherwise weak
echoes may be missed.
4-12
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.7
Reducing Low Level Noise
Dots (light-blue on the color model) may appear over most of the screen. This is
mainly due to sediment in the water or noise. This noise can be suppressed by
adjusting CLUTTER on the SOUNDER menu.
Appearance of clutter
When the sounder mode is Auto, the clutter suppression setting is fixed at AUTO.
To reduce low level noise in manual sounder operation do the following:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select CLUTTER and press the EDIT soft key to show the clutter window.
CLUTTER
▲
00
▼
Clutter window
4. Use the cursor pad to select clutter rejection level desired; 0 (OFF) through
16, default setting, 9. The higher the number the higher the degree of
suppression. Note that the clutter suppressor may erase weak echoes.
Therefore, turn off the clutter when its use is not required.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: Unlike the signal level feature, clutter does not reduce echo colors.
However, if you do not wish to change the relation between weak and
strong echoes, use signal level instead.
4-13
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.8
Erasing Weak Echoes
Sediment in the water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the display
in green or light blue (color display) or “spots” on the background (monochrome
display). These weak echoes may be erased as below.
Weak
echoes
Appearance of weak echoes
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select SIGNAL LEVEL, and press the EDIT soft key to show the signal level
window.
SIGNAL LEVEL
¤ OFF
¡ SL1
¡ SL2
¡ SL3
¡ SL4
¡ SL5
¡ SL6
16-color display
SIGNAL LEVEL
¤ OFF
¡ SL1
¡ SL2
¡ SL3
8-color display
SIGNAL LEVEL
¤ OFF
¡ SL1
¡ SL2
Monochrome display
Signal level window
4. Use the cursor pad to select level of erasure or OFF as appropriate. The
higher the number the stronger the echo that will be erased.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: Unlike “clutter,” signal level reduces echo colors. Therefore if you do not
wish to reduce echo colors use clutter instead.
4-14
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.9
White Marker (GD-1700C/1710C)
The white marker functions to display a particular echo color in white. For
example, you may want to display the bottom echo in white to discriminate fish
echoes near the bottom.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select WHITE MARKER, and press the EDIT soft key to open the white
marker window.
WHITE MARKER
▲
OFF
▼
White marker window
4. Use the cursor pad to select color to display in white. As you use the cursor
pad, the number (corresponds to echo number) in the marker window
changes, the white marker on the echo strength bar shifts and selected echo
color is displayed in white.
White marker shows
← color currently
displayed in white.
Echo strength bar (16 color) when white marker function is active
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
To turn the white marker function off, display “OFF” in the white marker window.
4-15
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.10
Picture Advance Speed
The picture advance speed determines how quickly the vertical scan lines run
across the screen. When selecting a picture advance speed, keep in mind that a
fast advance speed will expand the size of the fish school horizontally on the
screen and a slow advance speed will contract it.
The advancement speed may be set independent of or synchronized with ship’s
speed.
4.10.1
Advancement independent of ship’s speed
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select PICTURE ADVANCE, and press the EDIT soft key to open the picture
advance window.
PICTURE ADVANCE
▲
¤ 2/1
¡ 1/1
¡ 1/2
¡ 1/4
¡ 1/8
¡ 1/16
¡ STOP
▼
Picture advance window
4. Use the cursor pad to select speed desired. The functions in the window
denote the number of scan lines produced per transmission. For example,
1/8 means one scan line is produced every eight transmissions. STOP
freezes the display and it is convenient for observing an echo.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: For the C-MAP specification unit, when using the plotter/sounder
combination display, advancement of the sounder picture may be
temporarily interrupted while the plotter display is being shifted or its
display range is being changed.
4-16
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.10.2
Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed
With speed data provided by a speed measuring device, picture advance speed
may be automatically synchronized with ship’s speed. As shown in the figure
below the horizontal scale of the display is not influenced with the speed
dependent picture advance mode active, thus it permits judgment of fish school
size and abundance at any speed.
Fish school shrinks as speed
is increased; expanded
as speed is decreased.
Normal Mode
Same size
fish schools
Speed
FULL
SPEED
HALF
SPEED
Actual Movement
Fish schools are shown
same size regardless
of ship’s speed.
Speed-Dependent Picture Advance Mode
How the speed-dependent picture advance mode works
Activating/deactivating the speed-dependent picture advance mode
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the [MENU] key followed by the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
Select PRR LEVEL.
Press the EDIT soft key to open the setting window.
Use the cursor pad to select SPD SENSING PRR.
Press the ENTER soft key.
Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Note: Use the same speed data (SOG or STW) throughout the network for
smooth advancement of the sounder picture.
4-17
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.11
Display Colors (GD-1700C/1710C)
You can select the number of colors and background color to display as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select HUE, and then press the EDIT soft key to show the hue window.
HUE
▲
1
▼
Hue window
4. Use the cursor pad to select hue number, referring to the table below. (You
can see the result of your selection on the display.)
Hue no. and background and echo colors
Hue No.
Echo Color
Background Color
1
16 color
Blue
2
8 color
Blue
3
16 color
Dark blue
4
8 color
Dark blue
5
16 color
White
6
8 color
White
7
16 color
Black
8
8 color
Black
9
Monochrome, eight intensities
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
4-18
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.12
Alarms
The sounder section has five conditions which generate visual and aural alarms:
bottom alarm, fish alarm (bottom lock), fish alarm (normal) and water
temperature alarm (temperature sensor required). For 1700C/1710C, note that
the alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to
background color when the [CLEAR] key or CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed.
The color does not change when another alarm is violated.
You may set up the sounder alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be
displayed by pressing the [ALARM] key.
AUDIO ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
BOTTOM ALARM
OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM
OFF
FISH ALARM
OFF
FISH ALARM (B/L)
OFF
SOUNDER
ALARM
EDIT
CLEAR
ALARM
RETURN
ALARM INFOMATION
NO ALARM
Sounder alarm menu
4.12.1
Audio alarm on/off
The audio alarm sounds whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can enable
or disable the audio alarm as follows:
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select AUDIO ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
AUDIO ALARM
¡ INT & EXT BUZZ
¤ INTERNAL BUZZ
¡ OFF
Audio alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm),
INTERNAL BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF. This turns on or off the audio alarm
for all modes globally, including radar.
5. Press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
4-19
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.12.2
Bottom alarm
The bottom alarm sounds when the bottom echo is within the alarm range set.
To activate the bottom alarm the depth must be displayed. Note that the bottom
alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the bottom alarm on the plotter alarm
menu.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select BOTTOM ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the bottom alarm window.
BOTTOM ALARM
▲
¡
ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
¤ OFF
▼
Bottom alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, enter alarm
range with the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob: Use ◄ or ► to select digit;
rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
4.12.3
Fish alarm
The fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within the preset alarm range. Note
that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER SYSTEM
SETUP menu.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select FISH ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm window.
FISH ALARM
▲
¡ ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
¤ OFF
▼
Fish alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the
cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to select
digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
4-20
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.12.4
Fish alarm (B/L)
The bottom-lock fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within a predetermined
distance from the bottom. Note that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on
the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP menu.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select FISH ALARM (B/L).
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm (B/L) window.
FISH ALARM (B/L)
▲
¡ ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
¤ OFF
▼
Fish alarm (B/L) window
4. Use the cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the
cursor pad and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to select
digit; rotate the [ENTER] knob to set value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
4-21
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.12.5
Water temperature alarm
There are two types of water temperature alarms: WITHIN RANGE and OUT OF
RANGE. The WITHIN RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is
within the range set, the OUT OF RANGE alarm sounds when the water
temperature is higher or lower than the range set. This alarm requires water
temperature data.
Note that the water temperature alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the
water temperature alarm on the plotter alarm menu.
1. Press the [ALARM] key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Use the cursor pad to select TEMPERATURE ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the temperature alarm window.
TEMPERATURE ALARM
▲
¡ WITHIN RANGE
-000.0 - +000.0°F
¡ OUT OF RANGE
-000.0 - +000.0°F
¤ OFF
▼
Water temperature alarm window
4. Use the cursor pad to select WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE or OFF as
appropriate. For WITHIN RANGE and OUT OF RANGE, use the cursor pad
and [ENTER] knob to enter alarm range: Use ◄ or ► to select digit; rotate
the [ENTER] knob to set value.
5. Press the ENTER soft key or push the [ENTER] knob to register setting.
6. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
4-22
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.12.6
When an alarm setting is violated...
When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker
icon appears (in red on the color model). Press the [CLEAR] key to silence the
alarm. For color models, press the [ALARM] key, CLEAR ALARM soft key to
change the speaker icon from red to black. You can see which alarm has been
violated on the alarm menu display. In the example below the fish alarm has
been violated.
To see which alarm(s) has been violated;
1. Press the [ALARM] key. The offending alarm is shown in the ALARM
INFORMATION window.
AUDIO ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
BOTTOM ALARM
OFF
TEMPERATURE ALARM
OFF
FISH ALARM
0020.0-0030.0ft
FISH ALARM (B/L)
OFF
SOUNDER
ALARM
EDIT
CLEAR
ALARM
RETURN
Alarm information
window
ALARM INFOMATION
FISH ALARM!
Speaker icon
Sounder alarm menu
2. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the
buzzer if it was not already silenced with the [CLEAR] key.) For the color
model, the speaker icon changes from red to background color on the color
model and changes to normal video on the monochrome model. The speaker
icon remains on the screen until the reason for the alarm is eliminated.
Note: If more than one alarm has been violated the message CONTINUE
appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this case
press the NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been
violated.
3. Press the [ALARM] key to finish.
4-23
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
Alarm messages
The table below shows the sounder alarm messages and their meanings
Sounder alarm messages and their meanings
Message
DEPTH ALARM!
FISH ALARM!
TEMPERATURE ALARM!
4.13
Meaning
Bottom alarm violated.
Fish alarm violated.
Water temperature alarm violated.
Water Temperature Graph
The water temperature graph (appropriate sensor required) plots water
temperature on the sounder display. (See the figure on page 4-3.) It can be
turned on or off as below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4.14
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
Select TEMPERATURE GRAPH and press the EDIT soft key.
Select OFF (default setting) or ON as appropriate.
Press the ENTER soft key.
Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Changing Pulse Repetition Rate
Pulse repetition rate can be changed. Normally, the highest rate (20) is used.
When in shallow waters, second reflection echoes may appear between surface
and actual bottom echo. In this case lower the PRR level. The option “SPD
SENSING PRR” means the ship’s speed dependent mode, where the PRR
changes automatically with ship’s speed (required speed input.) For further
information about the ship’s speed dependent mode, see page 4-17.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
Press the cursor pad to select PRR LEVEL.
Press the EDIT soft key to open the setting window.
Use the cursor pad to select he rate for repetition.
Press the ENTER soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Too small setting reduces the number of pulse repetition. This may cause a
problem to search fish schools. Select “20” unless multistage reflections appear
on the display.
4-24
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.15
Interpreting the Sounder Display
4.15.1
Zero line
The zero line (sometimes referred to as the transmission line) represents the
transducer’s position.
Zero line
Shift
Zero line
4.15.2
Bottom echo
Echoes from the bottom are normally the strongest and are displayed in
reddish-brown (color model) or darkest tone (monochrome model) but the color
(tone on the monochrome model) and width will vary with bottom composition,
water depth, frequency, sensitivity, etc.
In a comparatively shallow depth, a high gain setting will cause a second or
sometimes a third or a fourth echo to be displayed at the same interval between
them below the first echo trace. This is because the echo travels between the
bottom and the surface twice or more in shallow depths.
The color (tone for monochrome model) of the bottom echo can be used to help
determine the density of the bottom materials (soft or hard). The harder the
bottom, the wider the trace. If the gain is set to show only a single bottom echo
on mud, a rocky bottom will show a second or third bottom return. The range
should be chosen so the first and second bottom echoes are displayed when
bottom hardness is being determined.
Intensity difference
in water depth
Rock base
Mud and sand
Second bottom
echo
Bottom echoes
4-25
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
4.15.3
Fish school echoes
Fish school echoes will generally be plotted between the zero line and the
bottom. Usually the fish school/fish echo is weaker than the bottom echo
because its reflection property is much smaller compared to the bottom. The size
of the fish school can be ascertained from the density of the display.
Size of
fish school
Small
school
Large
school
Fish school echoes
4.15.4
Surface noise/Aeration
When the waters are rough or the boat passes over a wake, surface noise may
appear near the zero line. As surface turbulence is acoustically equivalent to
running into a brick wall, the bottom echo will be displayed intermittently. Similar
noise sometimes appears when a water temperature difference (thermocline)
exists. Different species of fish tend to prefer different temperature zones, so the
thermocline may be useful to help identify target fish. 200 kHz tends to show
shallow thermoclines better than 50 kHz.
In rough waters the display is occasionally interrupted due to below-the-ship air
bubbles obstructing the sound path. This also occurs when the boat makes a
quick turn or reverses movement. However, reconsideration of the transducer
installation may be necessary if the interruption occurs frequently.
Surface noise
Caused by aerated
water
Thermocline
Surface noise/aeration
4-26
5.
CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
This chapter describes the various options which allow you to set up your unit to
suit your needs. For mode-specific menus, e.g. radar, plotter and sounder, make
sure that you select the appropriate display when making changes or viewing
menu options.
5.1
General Setup
This paragraph shows you how to set up functions common to the plotter, radar
and sounder displays. This is done on the GENERAL SETUP menu, which you
may display from any mode. These items include language, key beep, units of
measurement, data sources, etc.
1. Press the [MENU] key to display the main menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key.
KEY BEEP
ON
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
RANGE UNIT
nm, kt
TEMPERATURE UNIT
°F
DEPTH UNIT
ft
TEMPERATURE SOURCE
NMEA
DEPTH SOURCE
NMEA
RESET TRIP LOG
NO
SPEED SOURCE
NMEA
GENERAL
SETUP1
EDIT
NEXT
PAGE
RETURN
Page 1 (GD-1700C/1710C, GD-1700)
LAT/LON DISPLAY
DD° MM.MMMM'
TD DISPLAY
LORAN C
SPEED
SOG
POSITION DISPLAY
LAT/LON
TIME DISPLAY
24 HOURS
INFRARED REMOTE MODE
A
RANGE & BEARING MODE
RHUMB LINE
BEARING READOUT
MAGNETIC
MAGNETIC VARIATION
AUTO 07.0° E
GENERAL
SETUP2
EDIT
PREV.
PAGE
Page 2 (GD-1700C/1710C)
LAT/LON DISPLAY
DD° MM.MMMM'
TD DISPLAY
LORAN C
SPEED
SOG
POSITION DISPLAY
LAT/LON
TIME DISPLAY
24 HOURS
INFRARED REMOTE MODE
A
RANGE & BEARING MODE
RHUMB LINE
BEARING READOUT
MAGNETIC
MAGNETIC VARIATION
AUTO 07.0° E
DISPLAY MODE
DAY
GENERAL
SETUP2
EDIT
PREV.
PAGE
Page 2 (GD-1700)
General setup menu
4. Press the NEXT PAGE or PREV. PAGE soft key to switch pages if
necessary.
5. Use the cursor pad to select item.
6. Press the EDIT soft key.
7. Use the cursor pad to select option desired, then press the ENTER soft key
or [ENTER] knob.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
5-1
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of general setup menu
Item
Description
Key Beep
Turns key beep on/off.
On, Off
Language
Chooses menu language.
English, French,
German, Italian,
Portuguese, Spanish
Range Unit
Chooses unit of range and speed
measurement.
nm, kt; km, km/h; sm,
mph; nm & yd, kt; nm &
m, kt; km & m, km/h; sm
& yd, mph
Temperature Unit
Chooses unit of water temperature
measurement.
°C,°F
Depth Unit
Chooses unit of depth measurement.
ft, m, fa, P/B
(Passi/Braza)
Temperature
Source
Chooses source of water temperature data.
ETR, NMEA. Select ETR
to show water
temperature data fed
from the network
sounder.
Depth Source
Chooses source of depth data.
ETR, NMEA. Select ETR
to show depth data fed
from the network
sounder.
Reset Trip Log
Resets distance run to zero.
Yes, No
Sped Source
Chooses source of own ship’s speed data.
ETR, NMEA
Lat/Lon Display
Chooses how many digits (or seconds) to
display after decimal point in latitude and
longitude position.
DD°MM.MM’,
DD°MM.MMM’,
DD°MM.MMMM’,
DD°MM’SS.S”
TD Display
Chooses TD type.
Loran C, Decca
Speed
Chooses speed format to display.
SOG (Speed over
ground), STW (Speed
through water)
Position Display
Chooses position display format.
LAT/LON, TD
Time Display
Chooses time notation.
12 hours, 24 hours
Infrared Remote
Mode
A remote controller can be set exclusively for A, B, C, D
use with a specific display unit, in the case
of multiple NavNet display units. For further
details see the Installation Manual.
(Con’t on next page)
5-2
Settings
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of general setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
Range & Bearing
Mode
Chooses how to calculate range and
bearing.
Rhumb Line: Straight
line drawn between two
points on a nautical
chart.
Great Circle: Shortest
course between two
points on the surface of
the earth.
Bearing Readout
Chooses bearing display format for course,
course over ground and cursor bearing.
True, Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
The magnetic variations for all areas of the
earth are preprogrammed into this unit. The
preprogrammed variation is accurate for
most instances, however you may wish to
manually enter a variation. For manual input,
select Manual, hit the EDIT soft key, enter
value, then hit the ENTER soft key to finish.
“AUTO” requires position data.
Auto, Manual
Display Mode
(GD-1700)
Reverses background (black) and
foreground (white) colors.
Day, Night
5-3
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.2
Plotter Setup
This paragraph provides the information necessary for setting up the plotter
display.
5.2.1
Navigation options
Navigation options, for example, waypoint switching method, may be set on the
PLOTTER SETUP menu.
1. Show the plotter display, then press the [MENU] key open the main menu.
2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
WAYPOINT SWITCHING
ARRVL ALM CRCL
COURSE VECTOR
LINE
SET GOTO METHOD
1POINT
QP
INTERNAL
PLOTTER
SETUP
EDIT
D. BOX
RETURN
Plotter setup menu
Contents of plotter setup menu
Item
5-4
Description
Settings
Waypoint
Switching
Chooses waypoint switching method. See
“switching waypoints” on page
2-51.
Perpendicular, Arrvl
Alm Crcl, Manual
Course Vector
You may extend a line from the own ship
position to show ship’s course. It may be a
vector (length depends on ship’s speed) or a
simple line (course bar).
Line, Vector, Off
Set GOTO
Method
Sets the method by which to navigate to a
quick point. See the paragraph “2.10.1
Navigating to a quick point.”
1 Point, 35 Points,
35 Pts/Port Service
QP
To display destination waypoint from an
external navigator connected, set “EXT WPT
(RMB).”
EXT WPT (RMB),
INTERNAL
D. BOX
(soft key)
Sets up data boxes. See paragraph 5.4.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default
plotter function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function
Key
1
2
3
4
5
Start/stop recording/plotting own ship’s track.
Edit mark/line.
Ruler (measure range and bearing between two points).
Function
Key Label
TRK
EML
RUL
Add new waypoint.
Alphanumeric waypoint list.
ADD
APL
Default Function
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
Function
key label
FUNC
KEY
▲
Function key
setting
SOFT KEY 1
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
SOFT KEY 2
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
SOFT KEY 3
RUL: RULER
SOFT KEY 4
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
SOFT KEY 5
ALP: ALPHA LIST
EDIT
T
R
K
E
M
L
R
U
L
A
D
D
RETURN
A
L
P
Plotter function key menu
3. Select the soft key you want to program, then press the EDIT soft key. A
menu shows the functions available and the current selection is highlighted.
SOFT KEY 1
Scroll
OFF
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
MWP: MOVE WPT
RUL: RULER
GWP: GOTO WPT
GRT: GOTO ROUTE
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
DTT: DEL TGT TRK
ALP: ALPHA LIST
LCL: LOCAL LIST
RTE: ROUTE LIST
▲
5.2.2
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
Plotter function key options
5-5
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
4. Select function desired with the cursor pad or [ENTER] knob, then press the
ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Plotter function keys
Menu Item
Function
Function Key
Label
OFF
Assigns no function.
—
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
Registers waypoint at cursor position. Place
cursor for waypoint location, then press function
key.
ADD
MWP: MOVE WPT
Moves selected waypoint to different position.
Select position, press the function key, select
new location, then push the [ENTER] knob.
MWP
RUL: RULER
Measures range and bearing between two
points. Press START POINT soft key to change
starting point if necessary. Range and bearing
between two points appears at the top of the
screen.
RUL
GWP: GOTO WPT
Specify waypoint to set as destination. Enter
name in window, then press the ENTER soft
key.
GWP
GRT: GOTO ROUTE
Specify route to follow. Enter name in window,
then press the ENTER soft key.
GRT
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
Displays mark & line menu. Press appropriate
soft key to access menu item.
EML
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
Each press stops or starts recording of own ship
track.
TRK
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
Turns TTM (target track) display on/off.
TTM
DTT: DEL TGT TRACK
Erases all TTM track.
DTT
ALP: ALPHA LIST
Displays waypoint alphanumeric list.
ALP
LCL: LOCAL LIST
Displays waypoint local list.
LCL
RTE: ROUTE LIST
Displays route list.
RTE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
Shows/hides data boxes.
DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
Changes control in combination screen.
CHG
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL, set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
5-6
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.3
Chart Setup
This paragraph shows you how to setup digital charts, from offsetting chart
position to turning chart attributes on or off.
5.3.1
Chart offset
In some instances position may be off by a few seconds. For example, the
position of the ship is shown to be at sea while it is in fact moored at a pier. You
can compensate for this error by offsetting chart position as shown in the
procedure below.
1. Show the plotter display, then press the [MENU] key followed by the CHART
SETUP and CHART OFFSET soft keys.
34 24. 3456 N 359.9°M
+124
24. 3456 W 0.21nm
CHART
OFFSET
SET
OFFSET
RESET
OFFSET
RETURN
Plotter display, chart offset selected
2. Use the cursor pad to place the cursor at the correct latitude and longitude
position of own ship.
3. Press the SET OFFSET soft key.
4. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu. The “chart offset icon” ( )
appears.
To cancel chart offset, press the RESET OFFSET soft key at step 3 in the above
procedure.
5-7
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.3.2
FURUNO, NavCharts™ chart attributes
FURUNO, NavCharts™ chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART
DETAILS menu, which you may display as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
GD-1700C/1710C
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
CNTOUR
LINE
RETURN
▲
▲
LAT/LON GRID
GREEN
TEXT INFORMATION
ON
WAYPOINTS
LARGE
WAYPOINT NAMES
ON
CHART BORDER LINES
ON
LANDMASS
BRT YELLOW
BACKGROUND
BLACK
NAVAIDS
ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
ON
OTHER SYMBOLS
WHITE
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
LAT/LON GRID
ON
TEXT INFORMATION
ON
WAYPOINTS
LARGE
WAYPOINT NAMES
ON
CHART BORDER LINES
ON
LANDMASS
ON
NAVAIDS
ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO
ON
OTHER SYMBOLS
OFF
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
GD-1700
Chart details menu (FURUNO, NavCharts™)
5-8
CHART
DETAILS
EDIT
CNTOUR
LINE
RETURN
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of chart details menu (FURUNO, NavCharts™)
Item
Description
Lat/Lon Grid
Latitude and
longitude grids
Text Information
Geographic
place, name
Waypoint size
Waypoints
Waypoint Names
Chart Border
Lines
Landmass
Background
Navaids
Light Sector Info
Other Symbols
Marks Size
CNTOUR LINE
soft key
(Depth contours
for depths at
right)*
Waypoint name
Border lines
(indices)
Landmass
brilliance
(monochrome
model), color
(color model)
Chart
background
color
Navaid data on
NavCharts™;
lighthouse data
on FURUNO
charts
Lighthouse
viewing sector
Other map
symbols
Mark size
Depth < 10 m
Depth = 10 m
Depth > 10 m
Depth Info
Settings
Default Setting
GD-1700C/1710C
Red, yellow,
Green
green, light-blue,
purple, blue,
white.
Off
On, Off
On
Settings
GD-1700
On, Off
Large, Small, Off
Large
On, Off
On, Off
On
On
Large, Small,
Off
On, Off
On, Off
Brt, Dim: Red,
yellow, green,
light-blue, purple,
blue, white.
Off
White, Black
Brt, Yellow
Brt, Dim, Off
Black
On, Off
On
On, Off
On, Off
On
On, Off
Red, yellow,
green, light-blue,
purple, blue,
white.
Off
Large, Small
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
White
On, Off
Normal
On, Red
On, Yellow
On, Light Blue
On, Red
Large, Small
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
On, Off
—
* = Depth contour color for GD-1700C/1710C available in, red, yellow, green,
light-blue, purple, blue, and white.
5-9
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
CNTOUR LINE soft key
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
3. Press the CNTOUR LINE soft key.
DEPTH < 10m
RED
DEPTH = 10m
YELLOW
DEPTH > 10m
LIGHT BLUE
DEPTH INFORMATION
RED
CNTOUR
LINE
EDIT
10m = APPROX. 30ft
OR 5fa OR 6pb
DEPTH < 10m
ON
DEPTH = 10m
ON
DEPTH > 10m
ON
DEPTH INFORMATION
ON
RETURN
GD-1700
Contour line menu (FURUNO, NavCharts™)
5-10
EDIT
10m = APPROX. 30ft
OR 5fa OR 6pb
RETURN
GD-1700C/1710C
CNTOUR
LINE
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.3.3
C-MAP chart attributes
C-MAP chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART DETAILS menu
as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
GD-1700C
GD-1710C
WAYPOINT
ON
WAYPOINT NAME
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
LAT/LON GRID
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CHART BORDER LINE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BACKGROUND COLOR
BLACK
PORT & SERVICE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
ATTENTION AREA
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
NAV LANE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
LIGHT
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BUOY & BEACON
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
SIGNAL
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CARTOGRAPHIC OBJECT
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CHART
DETAILS
PLACE NAME
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
COMPASS
EDIT
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
GD-1700
EDIT
TIDE & CURRENT
DEPTH
INFO
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
NATURAL FEATURE
DEPTH
INFO
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
RIVER & LAKE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CULTURAL FEATURE
NEXT
PAGE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
LANDMARK
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
RETURN
CHART GENERATION
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
PREV.
PAGE
NEW OBJECT
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
COMPLEX OBJECT ICON
MULTIPLE
INFORMATION LEVEL
BASIC
Page 1
WAYPOINT
ON
WAYPOINT NAME
ON
LAT/LON GRID
ON
CHART BORDER LINE
ON
PORT & SERVICE
ON
ATTENTION AREA
ON
NAV LANE
ON
LIGHT
ON
BUOY & BEACON
ON
SIGNALS
ON
CARTOGRAPHIC OBJECT
ON
CHART
DETAILS
Page 2
CHART
DETAILS
CHART
DETAILS
PLACE NAME
ON
COMPASS
EDIT
EDIT
ON
TIDE & CURRENT
DEPTH
INFO
ON
DEPTH
INFO
NATURAL FEATURE
ON
RIVER & LAKE
ON
CULTURAL FEATURE
NEXT
PAGE
LANDMARK
RETURN
CHART GENERATION
ON
ON
ON
PREV.
PAGE
NEW OBJECT
ON
COMPLEX OBJECT ICON
MULTIPLE
INFORMATION LEVEL
BASIC
Page 1
Page 2
Chart details menu (C-MAP)
5-11
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of chart details menu (C-MAP)
Item
Description
Settings
Default Setting
GD-1700C/1710C
Settings
GD-1700
Waypoint
Waypoint
display
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Waypoint Name
Waypoint name
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Lat/Lon Grid
Latitude and
longitude grids
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Chart Border
Line
Border lines
(indices)
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Background
Chart
background
color
White, Black
Black
Port & Service
Port services
icon display
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Attention Area
Attention area
icon display
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Plotter/
Contour, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Contour,
Off
Nav Lane
Navigation
lanes
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Light
Lighthouse
icon, sector
Plotter/Overlay
Plotter, Plot/No
Sector, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, No
Sector, Off
Buoy & Beacon
Buoys, beacons
display
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Signal
Signals
category icon
Plot & Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plot & Overlay
On, Off
Cartographic
Object
Cartographic
Plot & Overlay,
objects category Plotter, Off
icon
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Place Name
Geographic
names
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Compass
Compass
category icons
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Tide & Current
Tide display
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Natural Feature
Land outline
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
(Con’t on next page)
5-12
—
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of chart details menu for C-MAP (Con’t from previous page)
Settings
Default Setting
Settings
Item
Description
River & Lake
Rivers and lakes
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Cultural
Feature
Cultural features
icons
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Landmark
Landmarks
category icons
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Chart
Generation
Chart generation
category icons
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
New Object
New object
category icons
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Complex
Object Icon
Single or multiple
icon for object
composed of
several icons
Multiple, Single
Multiple
Multiple,
Single
Information
Level
Basic or detailed
data for objects
Basic, Detailed
Basic
Basic,
Detailed
DEPTH INFO
(soft key)
See illustration
on next page
Bathymetric Line
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Spot Sounding
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Bottom Type
Plotter/Overlay,
Plotter, Off
Plotter/Overlay
On, Off
Contour Shading
0-99999 ft
(m, fa, P/B)
20,164 ft (6, 50 m,
3, 27 fa,
4, 30 P/B)
0-99999 ft
(m, fa, P/B)
Spot Sounding
Range
0-99999 ft
(m, fa, P/B)
0-33 ft (0-10 m,
0-6 fa, 0-6 P/B)
0-99999 ft
(m, fa, P/B)
GD-1700C/1710C
GD-1700
5-13
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Settings description
Basic: Shows basic characteristics of objects.
Detailed: Shows detailed characteristics of objects.
Multiple: Shows multiple icons for complex objects.
Off: Turns item off.
On: Turns item on.
Plotter: Shows item on plotter display.
Plotter/Contour: Shows contour on plotter display.
Plotter/Overlay: Shows item on plotter and overlay displays.
Plot/No Sector: Shows item on plotter display. Sector not shown.
Single: Shows single icon for complex objects.
DEPTH INFO soft key
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART DETAILS soft keys.
3. Press the CNTOUR LINE soft key.
BATHYMETRIC LINE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
SPOT SOUNDING
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BOTTOM TYPE
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
CONTOUR SHADING
00020, 00164ft
SPOT SOUNDING RANGE
00000-00033ft
DEPTH
INFO
EDIT
BATHYMETRIC LINE
ON
SPOT SOUNDING
ON
BOTTOM TYPE
ON
CONTOUR SHADING
33ft
SPOT SOUNDING RANGE
00000-00033ft
RETURN
GD-1700C/1710C
DEPTH
INFO
EDIT
RETURN
GD-1700
Depth info menu (C-MAP)
Note: The spot sounding range setting allows you to control the color (or shade)
associated to user assigned depths. Any contour line area that contains a
depth that is LOWER than the first number will be shown in dark blue
(dark tone). Any contour line area that contains a depth BETWEEN the
first and second number will be shown as light blue (medium tone). Any
contour line area that contain a depth that is HIGHER than the second
number will be white (light tone). For example, if the spot sounding range
setting is set to 0010-00010 ft, all contour areas that contain any depth
less than 10 ft deep would be shaded dark blue (dark tone), all depth
contour areas that contain a depth between 10 and 50 feet will be shaded
light blue (medium tone), and all contour areas over 50 feet deep will be
white (light tone).
5-14
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.4
Data Boxes Setup
You may select the data to show in the data boxes for the plotter, radar and
sounder displays. Six boxes may be displayed in case of small size data box and
two for large size data box.
1. Display the plotter, radar or sounder display, whichever you want to set.
2. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.
3. Press one of the following sets of soft keys depending on the display selected
at step 1.
a) Plotter mode: PLOTTER SETUP, D. BOX
b) Radar mode: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP, D. BOX
c) Sounder mode: SOUNDER MENU, D. BOX
DATA
BOX
▲
DATABOX SIZE
SMALL
POSITION
WAYPOINT
COG
SOG
STW
BEARING
RANGE
TIME TO GO
ETA
TEMPERATURE
DEPTH
TRIP LOG
DATE
TIME
WIND
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
EDIT
RETURN
Data box menu
4.
5.
6.
7.
Use the cursor pad to select an item, then press the EDIT soft key.
Select ON or OFF as desired.
Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
Repeat steps 4-6 to turn other items on or off. Six items may be set to ON for
small data boxes; two for large data boxes.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
5-15
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.5
Hot Page Setup
Five user-arrangeable hot pages are provided for quick selection of desired
display.
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by pressing the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION,
SYSTEM SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV DISP SETUP and HOT PAGE SETUP
soft keys in that order.
HOT PAGE 1
HOT PAGE 2
HOT PAGE 3
HOT PAGE 4
HOT PAGE 5
Hot page setup menu
2. Use the cursor pad to select the hot page number to set, then press the EDIT
soft key. The full-screen selection window appears.
HOT PAGE 1
RADAR
PLOT
NAV
OVRLY
SNDR
Full-screen selection window (“OVRLY” for color model only)
5-16
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
3. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select the full-screen picture desired and push
the [ENTER] knob. A set of combination screens, corresponding to the
full-screen selected, appears.
HOT PAGE 1
10
20
-----
Combination screen selection window
4. Rotate the [ENTER] knob to select the full screen or combination screen
desired and push it to set.
5.6
Navigator Setup
This section provides the information necessary for selecting the type of
navigator connected to your plotter.
5.6.1
Navigation data source
The NAV SETUP menu mainly selects the source of nav data. For GPS receiver
other than the GP-310B/320B, speed averaging and local time offset (to use
local time) are also available. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and NAV SOURCE SETTINGS soft keys to
display the NAV SETUP menu.
POSITION SOURCE
ALL
SPEED AVERAGING*
0060
LOCAL TIME OFFSET*
+00:00
TEMP CALIBRATION
00°F
DEPTH CALIBRATION
00ft
NAV
SETUP
EDIT
* For GPS receiver other
than GP-310B/320B.
RETURN
Nav setup menu
5-17
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of nav setup menu
Item
Position
Source
Description
Chooses source of position data.
Speed
Averaging
Calculation of ETA is based on average
ship’s speed over a given period. If the
period is too long or too short, calculation
error will result. Change this setting if the
ETA seems wrong.
GPS uses UTC time. If you would rather use
local time, enter the time difference between
it and UTC. Use the +<-->- soft key to switch
from plus to minus and vice versa.
Local Time
Offset
Temp
Calibration
Depth
Calibration
5.6.2
Settings
FURUNO BB GPS: GPS
Receiver GP-310B/320B
GP: GPS navigator (via
NETWORK or NMEA port)
LC: Loran C navigator (via
NETWORK or NMEA port)
ALL: Multiple navaid
connection (via NETWORK or
NMEA port)
0-9999 seconds
Offsets NMEA water temperature data.
-13:30 to +13:30
This setting is not necessary
when the time difference is
entered at the navaid
connected.
-40°F - +40°F
Offsets NMEA depth data.
-15 - +90 ft
GPS receiver setup (Set equipped with GP-310B/320B)
The GPS SETUP menu sets up the GPS Receiver GPS-310B/320B. Press the
[MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and
GPS SENSOR SETTINGS soft keys to display this menu.
LOCAL TIME OFFSET
+00:00
GEODETIC DATUM
WGS-84
POSITION SMOOTHING
000 second(s)
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING
005 second(s)
GPS SPEED AVERAGING
060 second(s)
LATITUDE OFFSET
0.000'N
LONGITUDE OFFSET
0.000'E
DISABLE SATELLITE
__ __ __
LATITUDE
45∞ 35.000' N
LONGITUDE
125∞ 00.000' E
ANTENNA HEIGHT
005 m
GPS FIX MODE
2D/3D
COLD START
NO
GPS
SETUP
EDIT
GPS
STATUS
WAAS
SETUP
RETURN
GPS setup menu
5-18
Appears only when
GP-320B is connected.
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of GPS setup menu
Item
Local Time Offset
Geodetic Datum
Position Smoothing
Spd/Cse
Smoothing
Description
GPS uses UTC time. If you would rather
use local time, enter the time difference
between it and UTC. Use the +< - ->- soft
key to switch from plus to minus and vice
versa.
Geodetic datum is a reference for
geodetic survey measurements consisting
of fixed latitude, longitude and azimuth
values associated with a defined station of
reference. You must have the correct
geodetic datum selected in your plotter so
that it will reference the correct point on
the chart for a given latitude and
longitude. Although WGS-84 is now the
world standard, other categories of charts
still exist. Refer to Appendix for a full list of
geodetic datum.
When the DOP or receiving condition is
unfavorable, the GPS fix may change
greatly, even if the vessel is not moving.
This change can be reduced by
smoothing the raw GPS fixes. A setting
between 000 to 999 is available. The
higher the setting the more smoothed the
raw data. If the setting is too high, the
response time required to show a change
of latitude and longitude will be too long.
This is especially noticeable if the vessel
is moving fast. Increase the setting if the
GPS fix changes randomly.
During position fixing, ship’s velocity
(speed and course) is directly measured
by receiving GPS satellite signals. The
raw velocity data may vary too much
depending on receiving conditions and
other factors. You can reduce this random
variance by increasing the smoothing. The
higher the smoothing setting, the more the
raw data will be averaged. If this setting is
high, the response to speed and course
changes will slow. For no smoothing,
enter all zeroes.
Settings
-13:30 to +13:30 hours
See Appendix for full
list.
0-999 seconds
0-999 seconds
5-19
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of GPS sensor settings menu (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
GPS Speed
Averaging
Calculation of ETA is based on average ship’s
speed over a given period. If the period is too
long or too short, calculation error will result.
Change this setting if calculation error occurs.
The default setting is suitable for most
conditions.
0-999 seconds
Latitude,
Longitude Offset
Offsets latitude position to In addition, refine
position accuracy. Use the N < - - > - S soft key
to switch coordinate.
0.001’S – 9.999’N
0.001’E – 9.999’W
Disable Satellite
Every GPS satellite is broadcasting abnormal
satellite number(s) in its Almanac, which
contains general orbital data about all GPS
satellites, including those which are
malfunctioning. Using this information, the GPS
receiver automatically eliminates any
malfunctioning satellite from the GPS satellite
schedule. However, the Almanac sometimes
may not contain this information. If you hear
about a malfunctioning satellite from another
source, you can disable it manually. Enter
satellite number (two digits, max. 3 satellites),
then press the ENTER soft key.
Max. 3 satellites
Latitude
Sets initial latitude position after cold start. Use
the N < - - > - S soft key to switch coordinate.
—
Longitude
Sets initial longitude position after cold start.
Use the W < - - > - E soft key to switch
coordinate.
—
Antenna Height
Enters the height of the GPS antenna unit
above sea surface. For further details, refer to
the installation manual.
0-99 m
GPS Fix Mode
Chooses position fixing method: 2D (three
satellites in view), 2D/3D (three or four satellites
in view whichever is greater).
2D, 2D/3D
Cold Start
Clears the Almanac to receive the latest
Almanac.
No, Yes
GPS STATUS
(soft key)
Displays GPS satellite status display. Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B or
GPS navigator outputting the data sentence GSA or GSV. For further details
see the chapter on Maintenance.
5-20
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
WAAS SETUP
Press the WAAS SETUP soft key to show the WAAS SETUP display.
Note: This function requires GP-320B antenna. Also, confirm that your display
unit has the program version no. shown below.
NavChart type: Ver.12 and after (1710C: Ver.4 and after)
C-map type: Ver.8 and after (1710C: Ver.4 and after)
Contents of WAAS SETUP menu
Item
Description
Settings
WAAS MODE
Select ON to use the WAAS mode.
On, Off
WAAS SEARCH
WAAS satellite can be searched
automatically or manually. For manual
search, enter appropriate WAAS satellite
number.
Auto, Manual
WAAS ALARM
When the WAAS signal is lost, the audible
alarm sounds with the visual message “NO
WAAS SIGNAL.”
On, Off
On: Alarm continues to sound until the WAAS
positioning mode is available again or the
alarm is recognized by key operation.
Off: Alarm sounds three times.
CORRECTION DATA
SET
Selects the type of message for WAAS
correction. Use "02 (Default Setting)" until the
WAAS System changes from its current
"Testing Status" to "Operational Status".
00 to 27, 99
Note: If the message “NO POSITION DATA!” appears, it means an error occurs
on GPS-310B/320B. Disconnect GPS cable from the display unit.
5-21
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.6.3
TD display setup
The TD SETUP menu sets which Loran C or Decca chain to use to display TD
position. (Connection of a Loran C or Decca navigator is not necessary to
display TD position.)
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and TD SETUP soft
keys to display the TD SETUP menu.
TD
LORAN-C
SETUP
GRI
9940:11-27
U.S. WEST COAST
CORRECTION 1
+000.0 µs
CORRECTION 2
+000.0 µs
DECCA
CHAIN
01 R-G
S BALTIC
CORRECTION 1
+00.00 lane
CORRECTION 2
+00.00 lane
EDIT
RETURN
TD setup menu
Displaying Loran C TDs
1. Select GRI, then press the EDIT soft key to show the GRI & station pair
window.
GRI & STATION PAIR
▼
▲
9940
11-27
▼
U.S. WEST COAST
Loran GRI & station pair window
2. Use ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad to select GRI code.
3. Press ► to enable selection of station pair.
4. Use ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad to select station pair.
GRI & STATION PAIR
▲
▼
9940
11-27
▼
U.S. WEST COAST
Loran GRI & station pair window
5. Press the ENTER soft key to register your selection.
5-22
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
6. If necessary, you may enter a position offset to refine Loran C position
accuracy. Select (GRI) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the
EDIT soft key. Enter correction value with the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob,
then press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob. Use the +<− −>- soft key
to switch from plus to minus and vice versa.
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice.
8. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the NEXT PAGE soft key.
9. Select “LORAN C” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”
10. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key twice to close the
menu.
Displaying DECCA TDs
1. Select CHAIN, then press the EDIT soft key to show the chain & station pair
window.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
01
▼
▲
R-G
▼
S BALTIC
Decca chain and station pair window
2. Use ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad to select Decca chain number.
3. Press ► to enable selection of station pair.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
▲
▼
01
R-G
▼
S BALTIC
4.
Use ▲ or ▼ on the cursor pad to select lane pair (R: red, G: green and P:
purple).
5. Press the ENTER soft key to register your selection.
6. If necessary, you may enter position offset to refine Decca position. Select
(CHAIN) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the EDIT soft key.
Enter correction value with the cursor pad and [ENTER] knob, then press the
ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob. Use the +<− −>- soft key to switch from
plus to minus and vice versa.
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice.
8. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the NEXT PAGE soft key.
9. Select “DECCA” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”
10. Press the RETURN soft key.
11. Press the [MENU] key twice to close the menu.
5-23
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.7
Nav Data Display Setup
The nav data display shows various navigation data, fed from a navigator,
network equipment, etc. You may select the data to display and where to display
it as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the main menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV
DISP SETUP and NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.
NAV
DATA
1
POSITION
Positions
for full
screen
2
WPT POS
3
SOG
4
STW
5
COG
6
BEARING
7
RANGE
8
DEPTH
9
TEMP
10
LOG TRIP
11
TTG
EDIT
RETURN
12
ETA
Positions
for half
screen
13
DATE
14
TIME
Nav data setup screen
3. Use the cursor pad to select a location. Locations 1-9 are for the full-screen
nav data display and positions 10-14 for the half-screen nav data display.
4. Press the EDIT soft key. The following display appears.
DISPLAY DATA
¤
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
¡
POSITION
WPT POSITION
SOG
STW
COG
BEARING
RANGE
DEPTH
TEMPERATURE
TRIP LOG
TIME TO GO
ETA
DATE
TIME
WIND
Nav data setup window
5. Select the data to display, then press the ENTER soft key or [ENTER] knob
to register your selection.
6. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
5-24
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.8
Radar Setup
This paragraph explains how to customize the radar display to suit your
operational needs.
Note: The RADAR RANGE SETUP soft key is inoperative.
5.8.1
Radar display setup
The radar display may be set up from the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu,
which contains items such as EBL reference and cursor position format.
1. Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
DISPLAY
SETUP
EDIT
▲
▲
EBL REFERENCE
RELATIVE
CURSOR POSITION
RNG & BRG-REL
TUNING
AUTO
TX SECTOR
OFF 000° 001°
NOISE REJECTION
OFF
BACKGROUND COLOR
BLACK/GREEN
ECHO COLOR
GREEN
WATCHMAN TIME
5 minutes
RANGE UNIT
nm
D. BOX
EBL REFERENCE
RELATIVE
CURSOR POSITION
RNG & BRG-REL
TUNING
AUTO
TX SECTOR
OFF 000° 001°
NOISE REJECTION
ON
WATCHMAN TIME
5 minutes
RANGE UNIT
nm
RETURN
GD-1700C/1710C
DISPLAY
SETUP
EDIT
D. BOX
RETURN
GD-1700
Radar display setup menu
5-25
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of radar display setup menu
Item
EBL Reference
Cursor Position
Tuning
TX Sector
Blanking
Noise Rejection
Description
Settings
References EBL bearing, shown in the
True, Relative
EBL data box, to North (True) or
heading (Relative). Relative with no
heading input. True only in course-up,
north-up and true motion.
Chooses how to display cursor position. LAT/LON: Lat/Long
position
TD: Loran C or Decca
Note: “RNG & BRG-TRUE” requires
TDs
heading data and true bearing.. The
RNG & BRG-REL:
equipment reverts to “Relative” when
Range
and bearing
heading data is lost.
referenced to ship’s
heading
RNG & BRG-TRUE:
Range and bearing
referenced to North
Selects receiver tuning method. For
Auto, Manual
further details, see the paragraph “3.6
Tuning.”
Turns on/off dead sector graphic, which On, Off
shows area where no echoes are
transmitted. To set, select ON then
enter range. Max. sector is 135°.
Dashed lines mark the dead sector.
Electrical noise, appearing on the
screen as “speckles,” may be
suppressed with the noise rejector.
Note that some forms of interference
cannot be suppressed.
(Con’t on next page)
5-26
Off, High, Low
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Contents of radar display setup menu (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
Background
Color
(GD-1700C,GD-1710C)
Chooses colors of background,
range rings and characters.
Effective when HUE soft key is
set for “MANUAL.”
Black/Green
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
Black/Red
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Red
Blue/White
Background: Blue
Rings: White
Characters: White
DK Blue/White
Background: Dark Blue
Rings: White
Characters: White
White/Green
Background: White
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
Echo Color
(GD-1700C,GD-1710C)
Chooses echo color.
Yellow, Green,
Multi-Color (Echoes
shown in red, yellow or
green in order of
descending strength.)
Watchman
Time
Sets watchman stand-by period.
For further details, see the
paragraph “3.23 Watchman.”
5, 10, 20 minutes
Range Unit
Sets unit of range
measurement.
nm, km, sm
5-27
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.8.2
Function key setup
The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default
radar function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function
Key
1
Default Function
Turn heading line off.
Function Key
Label
HL
2
3
4
Turn range rings on/off.
Turn echo trail on/off.
Turn display offcenter on/off.
RNG
TRL
OFC
5
STBY/TX
TX
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
FUNC
Function key
setting
Function
key label
SOFT KEY 1
HL: HDG LINE OFF
SOFT KEY 2
X RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
SOFT KEY 3
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
SOFT KEY 4
OFC: OFFCENTER
SOFT KEY 5
TX: STBY/TX KEY
EDIT
H
L
R
N
G
T
R
L
O
F
C
RETURN
T
X
Radar function key menu
3. Select the function key you want to program, then press the EDIT soft key.
SOFT KEY 1
SOFT KEY 1
S
Scroll
down
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
ALM: GUARD ALARM
EBL: EBL
VRM: VRM
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
WMK: WPT ON/OFF
WTM: WATCHMAN
ACQ: ACQUISITION
TX: STBY/TX
RSR: RADAR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
S
OFF
HL: HDG LINE OFF
MOD: MODE
GAI: GAIN
SEA: A/C SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN
FTC: FTC
ES: ECHO STRETCH
PLS: PULSE LENGTH
ZOM: ZOOM
OFC: OFFCENTER
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
Radar function key options
5-28
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
4. Select function desired with the cursor pad, then press the ENTER soft key
or [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
5. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Radar function keys
Menu Item
Function
Function Key
Label
OFF
Assigns no function.
—
HL: HDG LINE OFF
Turns heading line off.
HL
MOD: MODE
Selects presentation mode.
GAI: GAIN
Shows gain sensitivity adjustment window.
GAI
SEA: A/C SEA
Shows A/C SEA adjustment window.
SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN
Shows A/C RAIN adjustment window.
RAI
FTC: FTC
Displays FTC window. Adjust FTC with the [ENTER]
knob. Requires Model 1700 series radar.
Inoperative otherwise.
FTC
ES: ECHO STRETCH
Turns echo stretch on/off.
ES
PLS: PULSE LENGTH
Sets pulselength.
PLS
ZOM: ZOOM
Turns zoom on/off.
ZOM
OFC: OFFCENTER
Press to shift display center to cursor location.
Press again to turn shift off and return cursor to
display center.
OFC
TRL: ECHO TRAIL
Starts/stops echo trails.
TRL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
Turns range rings on/off.
RNG
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
Outputs cursor position, in NMEA format, to
navigator.
TLL
ALM: GUARD ALARM
Displays alarm soft keys.
ALM
EBL: EBL
Switches control between EBL1 and EBL2 with
each press.
EBL
VRM: VRM
Switches control between VRM1and VRM2 with
each press.
VRM
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
Turns TTM (Tracked Target Message) display
on/off.
TTM
WMK: WPT ON/OFF
Turns waypoint marker on/off.
WMK
WTM: WATCHMAN
Turns watchman on/off.
WTM
ACQ: ACQUISITION
Acquires and tracks cursor-selected target.
(Requires ARP-equipped Model 1800/1900 series
network radar.)
ACQ
TX: STBY/TX
Toggles between standby and transmit.
RSR: RADAR SOURCE
Selects source for radar picture.
RSR
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
Turns data boxes on/off.
DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
Changes display control in combination display.
CHG
MOD
TX
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL, set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
5-29
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.9
Sounder Setup
This section shows you how to customize your network sounder to your liking.
You can set fish alarm sensitivity, fine tune sensor data, etc.
5.9.1
System setup
1. Show the sounder display, then press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
FISH ALARM LEVEL
MEDIUM
TRANSMISSION
ON
TVG-HF
5
TVG-LF
5
ECHO OFFSET-HF
+00
ECHO OFFSET-LF
+00
BOTTOM LEVEL-HF
+000
BOTTOM LEVEL-LF
+000
KP PULSE
INTERNAL
SMOOTHING
OFF
TLL OUTPUT
ON
SYSTEM
SETUP1
EDIT
SENSOR
SETUP
STC-HF
00
STC-LF
00
FREQ. ADJ.-HF
+00.0 %
FREQ.ADJ.-LF
+00.0 %
TARGET ECHO
NORMAL
SYSTEM
SETUP2
EDIT
SENSOR
SETUP
NEXT
PAGE
PREV.
PAGE
RETURN
Page 1
Page 2
Sounder system setup menu
Sounder system setup menu description
Item
Fish Alarm Level
Transmission
Description
Sets the fish alarm sensitivity;
that is, the minimum echo
strength which will trigger the fish
alarms.
Turns TX power on/off.
(Continued on next page)
5-30
Settings
High: Orange and stronger echoes
(strongest echoes on monochrome
model) trigger the alarm.*
Medium: Yellow and stronger
echoes (medium strength echoes on
monochrome model) trigger the
alarm.*
Low: Green and stronger echoes
(weak echoes on monochrome
mode) trigger the alarm.*
* = 8-color display
On, Off
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
Sounder system setup menu description (con’t from previous page)
Item
Description
Settings
TVG
(LF, HF)
TVG (Time Varied Gain) compensates for propagation
attenuation of the ultrasonic waves. It does this by equalizing
echo presentation so that fish schools of the same size appear
in the same density in both shallow and deep waters. In
addition, it reduces surface noise. Note that if the TVG level is
set too high short range echoes may not be displayed.
0-9
Echo Offset
(LF, HF)
If the on-screen echo level appears to be too weak or too
strong and the level cannot be adjusted satisfactorily with the
gain control, adjust echo offset to compensate for too weak or
too strong echoes. The default setting for both 200 kHz and 50
kHz is zero.
-50 - +50
Bottom Level
(LF, HF)
If the depth indication is unstable in automatic operation or the
bottom echo cannot be displayed in reddish-brown by
adjusting the gain control in manual operation, you may adjust
the bottom echo level detection circuit, for both 50 kHz and
200 kHz, to stabilize the indication. Note that if the level is set
too low weak echoes may be missed and if set too high the
depth indication will not be displayed.
-100 - +100
KP Pulse
Selects source of keying pulse.
Internal, External
(See installation
manual.)
Smoothing
Smoothes echoes to present stable display. The higher the
setting the greater the smoothing.
SM1-SM4, OFF
TLL Output
Outputs current position to plotter where it is marked with TLL
mark. Use a soft key to output TLL.
ON, OFF
STC (HF, LF)
(For ETR-30N
only)
Adjusts STC level for the high and low frequencies, and is useful for
suppressing surface noise. The setting range is 0-10; the higher the setting
the greater the extent or suppression. Setting 10 suppresses noise up to
several meters. Turn off the STC when there is no noise on the screen,
otherwise weak echoes may be missed.
-10 - +10
FREQ. ADJ. (HF,
LF) (For
ETR-30N only)
Interference from other acoustic equipment operating nearby or other
electronic equipment on your boat may show itself on the display. You may
suppress these type of interference by adjusting frequency.
Normal, Surface
TARGET ECHO
(For ETR-30N
only)
Sets fishing objective. Normal for general fishing, Surface for detecting
surface. Pulse repetition rate is higher than Normal on the specified
transducer.
See next section for
details.
SENSOR
SETUP
(soft key)
Offsets speed, depth and water temperature indications and
speed of sound.
See next section
for details.
5-31
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.9.2
Sensor setup
The SENSOR SETUP menu lets you further refine speed, water temperature
and depth data fed from the network sounder.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP and SENSOR SETUP soft keys to
show the SENSOR SETUP menu. The current ship’s speed, water
temperature, depth and speed of sound are shown at the bottom of the
menu.
SPEED CALIBRATION
+ 00%
TEMP CALIBRATION
+ 0°F
DEPTH CALIBRATION
+0.0ft
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION
+ 000m/s
SPEED
TEMP
12.3kt
78.8°F
DEPTH
ACSTC SPD
125.0ft
SENSOR
SETUP
EDIT
RETURN
1500m/s
Sensor setup menu
3. Select item to adjust, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Use the cursor pad to set appropriate value.
Speed and temperature calibrations: Enter plus or minus value. For
example, if the water temperature readout is 77°F but the actual water
temperature is 75°F, enter –2(°F).
Depth calibration: If you desire the depth readout to show the distance
between ship’s draft and bottom (rather than transducer and bottom), set
ship’s draft here. Enter a plus or minus value.
Acoustic speed calibration: Sets the speed of sound used by the network
sounder. Normally no adjustment is required, however if echoes are returning
too slow or too fast adjust the value as appropriate. This is only used if water
salinity is at an extreme level. Under normal circumstances, do not adjust.
Sensor setup menu settings
Item
Speed Calibration
Temperature Calibration
Depth Calibration
Acoustic Speed Calibration
Settings
-50 -+50%
-40°F - +40°F
-15 - +90 ft
-500 - +500 m/s
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the [MENU] key to close the menu.
5-32
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.9.3
Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range
This paragraph shows you how to set custom ranges for basic range, zoom
range (marker and bottom zoom) and bottom lock range. All default basic ranges
are restored whenever the unit of depth measurement is changed. Therefore,
change the depth unit before changing the basic ranges.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the [MENU] key to open the main
menu.
2. Press the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP soft key to show the SOUNDER
RANGE SETUP menu.
RANGE
SETUP
RANGE 1
15 ft
RANGE 2
EDIT
30 ft
RANGE 3
60 ft
RANGE 4
120 ft
RANGE 5
200 ft
RANGE 6
400 ft
RANGE 7
1000 ft
RANGE 8
4000 ft
ZOOM RANGE
30 ft
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE
20 ft
RETURN
Sounder range setup menu
3. Select the range to change, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Use the cursor pad to set range desired, then press the RETURN soft key
For basic range, set depth from lowest to highest; a range cannot be higher
than its succeeding neighbor.
5. Press the [MENU] key to finish.
Default basic ranges
Range 1
Range 2
Range 3
Range 4
Range 5
Range 6
Range 7
5m
15 ft
3 fa
3 P/B
10 m
30 ft
5 fa
5 P/B
20 m
60 ft
10 fa
10 P/B
40 m
120 ft
20 fa
30 P/B
80 m
200 ft
40 fa
50 P/B
150 m
400 ft
80 fa
100 P/B
300 m
1000 ft
150 fa
200 P/B
Range 8
ETR-6/10N
1200 m
4000 ft
650 fa
700 P/B
ETR-30N
1500 m
4500 ft
900 fa
900 P/B
Setting range: 2 m –1200 m, 7 ft – 4000 ft, 1 fa – 650 fa, 1 P/B – 700 P/B
Zoom range and bottom lock ranges
Item
Zoom Range
Bottom-lock Range
Settings
2 m – 120 m, 7 ft – 400 ft,
1 fa – 60 fa, 1 P/B – 70 P/B
3 or 6 m, 10 or 20 ft
2 or 3 fa, 2 or 3 P/B
5-33
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5.9.4
Function key setup
The function keys, shown when the soft keys are turned off, provide one-touch
execution of a desired function. The default sounder function key settings are as
shown in the table below.
Function Key
1
2
3
4
5
Default Function
Output current position.
Suppress clutter.
Erase weak signal.
Suppress noise.
Set picture advancement speed.
Function Key Label
TLL
CLT
SLV
NL
PA
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:
1. Show the sounder display.
2. Press the [MENU] key.
3. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
▲
Function key
setting
Function
key label
FUNC
KEY
SOFT KEY 1
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
T
L
L
SOFT KEY 2
CLT: CLUTTER
SOFT KEY 3
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
SOFT KEY 4
NL: NOISE LIMITER
SOFT KEY 5
PA: PICTURE ADV
EDIT
C
L
T
S
L
V
N
L
P
A
RETURN
Sounder function key menu
4. Select the function key you want to program, then press the EDIT soft key.
SOFT KEY 1
SOFT KEY 1
▲
Scroll
down
TVL: TVG - LF
EOH: OFFSET - HF
EOL: OFFSET - LF
SMT: SMOOTHING
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE
BLR: B/L RANGE
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
SSR: SNDR SOURCE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
▲
OFF
MOD: AUTO MODE
GHF: GAIN - HF
GLF: GAIN - LF
SFT: SHIFT
NL: NOISE LIMITER
CLT: CLUTTER
WMK: WHITE MARKER
HUE: HUE
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
PA: PICTURE ADV
TG: TEMP. GRAPH
TVH: TVG - HF
Sounder function key options
5-34
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
5. Select function desired with the cursor pad.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the [ENTER] knob to register your selection.
7. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
Sounder function keys
Menu Item
Function
Function Key Label
OFF
Assigns no function.
MOD: AUTO MODE
Display automatic mode selection window.
MOD
GHF: GAIN - HF
Displays high frequency gain adjustment
window.
GHF
GLF: GAIN - LF
Displays low frequency gain adjustment
window.
GLF
SFT: SHIFT
Shifts range in manual operation.
SFT
NL: NOISE LIMITER
Suppresses noise.
NL
CLT: CLUTTER
Suppresses clutter.
CLT
WMK: WHITE MARKER
Sets white marker (color model only).
WMK
HUE: HUE
Sets hue (color model only).
HUE
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL
Erases weak signals.
SLV
PA: PICTURE ADV
Sets picture advance speed.
PA
TG: TEMP. GRAPH
Turns temperature graph on/off.
TG
TVH: TVG - HF
Sets TVG for high frequency.
TVH
TVL: TVG - LF
Sets TVG for low frequency.
TVL
EOH: OFFSET - HF
Offsets echo strength for high frequency.
EOH
EOL: OFFSET - LF
Offsets echo strength for low frequency.
EOL
SMT: SMOOTHING
Sets echo smoothing rate.
SMZ
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE
Sets zoom range.
ZMR
BLR: B/L RANGE
Sets bottom lock range for bottom-lock
display.
BLR
TLL: TLL OUTPUT
Outputs current position to plotter. Also
inscribes line on sounder and registers
position as a waypoint on plotter.
TLL
SSR: SNDR SOURCE
Selects source for sounder data.
SSR
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
Turns data boxes on/off.
DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
Switches control in combination display.
CHG
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL, set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
5-35
5. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
This page is intentionally left blank.
5-36
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.
DATA TRANSFER
This chapter provides information for saving and replaying data to and from
memory cards, uploading and downloading data, loading waypoint data from
Yeoman, and outputting data through the network.
Note: The data transfer function is not available for the optional memory card
interface unit CU-200.
6.1
Memory Card Operations
The memory cards store these data: marks, lines, waypoints, routes, track, and
setting data.
6.1.1
Formatting memory cards
Before you can use a memory card it must be formatted. This prepares the card
for use with the system. Note that formatting a memory card erases all data from
the card.
1. Insert a blank memory card into the card slot.
2. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, DATA
TRANSFER, UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA and SAVE DATA TO MEMORY
CARD soft keys to show the SAVE DATA menu.
▲
TRACKS
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
SETTING DATA
OFF
SAVE
DATA
EDIT
SAVE
FORMAT
RETURN
Save data menu
3. Press the FORMAT soft key. You are asked if you are ready to format the
memory card.
4. Push the [ENTER] knob to format (or press the [CLEAR] key to escape).
“NOW FORMATTING MEMORY CARD” appears. Do not remove the card
while it is being formatting. When the formatting is completed, “FORMAT
COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears.
5. Push the [ENTER] knob to continue.
Note: If the memory card was not inserted correctly, the message “FAILED TO
FORMAT MEMORY CARD.” appears.
6-1
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.1.2
Saving data to a memory card
1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot.
2. Press the [MENU] key followed by the CONFIGURATION, DATA
TRANSFER, UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA and SAVE DATA TO MEMORY
CARD soft keys to show the SAVE DATA menu.
▲
TRACKS
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
SETTING DATA*
OFF
SAVE
DATA
EDIT
SAVE
FORMAT
RETURN
* = Plotter data only
Save data menu
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Use the cursor pad to select item to save.
Press the EDIT soft key.
Use the cursor pad to select ON.
Press the ENTER soft key.
Repeat steps 3 to 6 to choose other data to save if desired.
Press the SAVE soft key, then press the [ENTER] knob. The message “NOW
SAVING DATA TO MEMORY CARD. DO NOT TURN OFF DISPLAY UNIT
UNTIL COMPLETED.” appears.
When saving is completed, “COMPLETED SAVING DATA. PUSH ENTER KNOB
TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the [ENTER] knob to continue.
6-2
6. DATA TRANSFER
Memory card messages
Various memory card messages appear to alert you to memory card-related
error. These are tabulated below.
Memory card messages
Message
Reason
Remedy
Memory card is not
inserted. Please insert
memory card. Push
ENTER knob to
continue.
Memory card not
inserted.
Push the [ENTER] knob to return to the
SAVE DATA display and then insert card.
Memory card is not
formatted. Push
ENTER knob to
continue.
Unformatted memory
card.
Push the [ENTER] knob to return to the
SAVE DATA display. Format the card
referring to page 6-1.
Wrong card is inserted.
Please insert correct
memory card. Push
ENTER knob to
continue.
Chart card inserted
instead of memory
card.
Remove chart card, insert memory card,
and then push the [ENTER] knob to
continue.
Overwrite data?
(Track)
(Mark)
(WPT)
(Config)
Data type to be
recorded exists on
memory card. (Two or
more of same type of
data cannot be
recorded.)
Push the [ENTER] knob to overwrite same
data type on the card, or press the
[CLEAR] key to escape.
6-3
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.1.3
Playing back data from a memory card
Data (marks, lines, track, waypoints, routes and setting data) can be loaded from
a memory card and displayed on the screen. This feature is useful for observing
past data and setting up the equipment for a specific purpose with “setting data.”
1. Press the [MENU] key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and
DATA TRANSFER soft keys.
2. Press the UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA soft key.
3. Press the LOAD DATA IN MEMORY CARD soft key to show the LOAD
DATA menu.
▲
TRACKS
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
SETTING DATA*
OFF
LOAD
DATA
EDIT
LOAD
RETURN
* = Plotter data only
Load data menu
4. Use the cursor pad to select item to load.
5. Press the EDIT soft key. (The EDIT soft key is inoperative when there is no
card inserted or no data exists in the card.)
6. Use the cursor pad to select ON. (Select OFF to not load selected data.)
Press the ENTER soft key. If the memory card does not contain the item
selected, the unit beeps and ON cannot be selected.
7. After selecting all items desired, press the LOAD soft key followed by the
[ENTER] knob. The message “START LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.”
appears.
8. After loading is completed, the message “COMPLETED LOADING DATA.
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the [ENTER] knob to
continue.
Notes on loading data
Tracks: Since loaded track data is added to internal track, oldest track will be
erased when the track memory capacity is exceeded.
Waypoints & routes: The loaded data replaces data previously stored.
Marks & lines: The loaded data is added to internal data. When the mark/line
memory becomes full no marks may be entered.
Setting data: The loaded data replaces current configuration settings. If the
memory card is ejected while loading or data could not be loaded, push the
[ENTER] knob to restart with default settings. Note that track memory capacity is
not saved or loaded. To use loaded setting data, turn the power off and on again.
6-4
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.2
Uploading, Downloading Data
You can upload/download waypoints, routes, marks and lines from/to a PC,
through the DATA 3 port at the rear of the display unit. Note that radar and
sounder data cannot be uploaded or downloaded.
6.2.1
Setting communication software on the PC
The communication format (RS-232C) with the PC is as follows:
Baud Rate:
Character Length:
Stop bit:
Parity:
X Control:
4800 bps
8 bits
1 bit
None
XON/XOFF (fixed)
The following data can be downloaded/uploaded between a PC and this
equipment:
• Waypoint data (In alphanumeric order)
• Route data (In order of route number)
• End of sentence
Note 1: There are two kinds of data for route data: route data and route
comment data.
Note 2: Wiring information appears on the UPLOAD or DOWNLOAD menu.
6.2.2
Uploading or downloading data
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Connect the PC to the equipment.
Press the [MENU] key to show the main menu.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
Press the UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA soft key.
Press the DOWNLOAD WPT/ROUTE TO PC or UPLOAD WPT/ROUTE
FROM PC soft key.
UPLOAD
RS232C SETTINGS
· 4800BPS,
· 8BIT,
·1STOP BIT,
· PARITY NONE,
· CONTROL Xon/Xoff
EDIT
UPLOAD
SELECT
WIRING INFORMATION
BPS
DISPLAY UNIT PC: DSUB9
TxD
>1>-WHITE-<2<RD
RxD
>2>-BLUE -<3<SD
RD-A
>3>-YELLOW
RD-B
>4>-GREEN
+12V
>5>-RED
RETURN
EXT BUZZ >6>-BLACK
GND
>7>-SHIELD-<5<SG
▲
▲
WAYPOINT & ROUTES
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINT & ROUTES
OFF
MARKS & LINES
OFF
DOWNLOAD
RS232C SETTINGS
· 4800BPS,
· 8BIT,
·1STOP BIT,
· PARITY NONE,
· CONTROL Xon/Xoff
EDIT
DWLOAD
SELECT
WIRING INFORMATION
BPS
DISPLAY UNIT PC: DSUB9
TxD
>1>-WHITE-<2<RD
RxD
>2>-BLUE -<3<SD
RD-A
>3>-YELLOW
RD-B
>4>-GREEN
+12V
>5>-RED
RETURN
EXT BUZZ >6>-BLACK
GND
>7>-SHIELD-<5<SG
Upload and download menus
6-5
6. DATA TRANSFER
7. To change the baud rate, press the SELECT BPS soft key.
BAUD RATE
▲
¤
¡
¡
4800 bps
9600 bps
19200 bps
▼
Baud rate window
8. Select baud rate, then press the ENTER soft key.
9. Press the DWLOAD or UPLOAD soft key. You are asked if you are ready to
download or upload waypoints and routes.
10. Push the [ENTER] knob to download or upload data.
Waypoint data format
PFEC, GPwpl, llll.llll, a, yyyyy.yyy, a, c----c, c, c----c, a <CR><LF>
1 2
3
4
5
6 7
8
Waypoint data format
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
Waypoint latitude
N/S
Waypoint longitude
E/W
Waypoint name (Number of characters is fixed to 6 and space code is placed
when the number of characters are less than 6.)
6: Waypoint color
7: Waypoint comment (1 byte for mark code + 13 characters of comment.)
1st byte of mark code: Fixed to “@”.
2nd byte of mark code: Internal mark code. See Note 1.
8. Information of marking waypoint. Always set to “A”.
“A”: Displayed
“V”: Not displayed
Note 1:The following characters can be used for comments:
_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789&'#
=9
=>
=B
=F
=;
=:
=?
=<
=@
=D
=C
=G
==
=A
=E
=H
Characters available for comment
6-6
6. DATA TRANSFER
Route data menu
$PFEC, GPrtc,
xx, c----c <CR><LF>
1
2
Route data format
1: Number of sentences required for one complete route data (1 to 4). See Note
2.
2: Number of sentences currently used (1 to 4)
3: Message mode (Always set to C)
4: Route No. (001 to 300, 3 digits required)
5 through 12: Waypoint name (Max. 8 names, length of each waypoint name is
fixed to 7 byte)
Note 2: A route can may contain 35 waypoints, and the GPRTE sentence for
one route data may exceed 80 byte limitation. In this case, route data is
divided into several GPRTE sentences (Max. 4 sentences). This value
shows the number of sentences the route data has been divided.
Route comment data format
$GPRTE, x, x, a, ccc, c----c, c----c, ... , c----c <CR><LF>
5
1 2 3
4
6
12
Route comment format
1: Route No. (01 to 200, 3 digits required)
2: Route comment (Max. 16 characters, variable length)
The same characters of the comment for waypoint comment can be used.
End of sentence
$PFEC, GPxfr,
CTL, E <CR><LF>
End of sentence
6-7
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.3
Loading Waypoint Data from Yeoman
Waypoint data can be loaded from a Yeoman to this equipment. Connect the
Yeoman to any DATA port on this equipment and then follow the procedure
below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION key.
Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
Press the RECEIVE YEOMAN DATA soft key.
You are asked if you are sure to receive waypoint data from Yeoman
equipment. Push the [ENTER] knob to receive the data.
The message “NOW RECEIVING YEOMAN DATA. PUSH SOFT KEY
‘STOP’ TO STOP RECEIVING.” Is displayed. If waypoint capacity is reached
the message “WAYPOINTS FULL. NO MORE WAYPOINT CAN BE
RECEIVED. PUSH ANY KEY TO STOP.” appears.
6. To stop receiving, press the STOP soft key.
7. After waypoints have been received, press the [MENU] key to close the
menu.
6-8
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.4
Receiving Data Via Network Equipment
You can receive waypoints, routes, marks and lines from NavNet equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Press the [MENU] key.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
Press the RECEIVE DATA VIA NETWORK soft key.
HOST NAME
PLOT1 - - MARKS & LINES
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
RECEIVE
DATA
EDIT
RCV
RETURN
Receive data menu
5. Select HOST NAME, then press the EDIT soft key.
HOST NAME
PLOT1---
Host name window
6. Use the cursor pad and the [ENTER] knob to input host name from which to
receive data, then push the [ENTER] knob.
7. Select the data you wish to receive, then press the EDIT soft key. For
example, select MARKS & LINES.
MARKS & LINES
▲
¡ ON
¤ OFF
▼
Marks & lines window
8. Select ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the ENTER soft key.
9. Turn WAYPOINTS & ROUTES on or off as appropriate.
6-9
6. DATA TRANSFER
10. Press the RCV soft key followed by the [ENTER] knob.
The message “NOW RECEIVING DATA.” is displayed. If no data could be
found, the message “(HOST NAME)’ IS NOT FOUND.” appears.
11. When the transfer is completed, the message “DATA TRANSFER
COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the
[ENTER] knob.
12. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
6.5
Outputting Data Through the Network
Follow the procedure below to output data through the network.
1. Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, PORT SETUP
and OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK soft keys.
SELECT SENTENCE
AAM
APB
BOD
BWR
DPT
GGA
GLL
GTD
MTW
RMA
RMB
RMC
VHW
VTG
WPL
XTE
ZDA
HDT
HDG
MWV
---------------------
SELECT
SNTNC
ON/OFF
RETURN
Select sentence menu
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select sentence with the cursor pad.
Press the ON/OFF soft key to turn sentence on or off.
Press the RETURN soft key.
Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
AAM: Waypoint arrival alarm, APB: Autopilot sentence B, BOD: Bearing origin to
destination, BWR: Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line, DPT: Depth,
GGA: Global positioning system(GPS) fix data, GLL: Geographic position latutude/longitude, GTD: Own ship information-TD, MTW: Water temperature,
RMA: Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data, RMB: Recommended
minimum navigation information, RMC: Recommended minimum specific
GPS/TRANSIT data, VHW: Water speed and heading, VTG: Course over ground
and ground speed, WPL: Waypoint location, XTE: Cross-track error, measured,
ZDA: Time and date, HDT: Heading true, HDG: Heading, deviation and variation,
MWV: Wind speed and angle
6-10
7.
MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter provides information necessary for keeping your unit in good
working order and remedying simple problems.
WARNING
Do not open the equipment.
Hazardous voltage which can
cause electrical shock exists
inside the equipment. Only
qualified personnel should
work inside the equipment.
7.1
Preventive Maintenance
Regular maintenance is important for optimum performance. A maintenance
program should be established and should at least include the items shown in
the table below.
Maintenance program
Item
Check point
Remedy
Display unit
connectors
Check for tight connection.
Tighten loosened connectors.
LCD
The LCD will, in time,
accumulate a coating of
dust which tends to dim the
picture.
Wipe the LCD carefully to prevent
scratching, using tissue paper and
an LCD cleaner. To remove dirt or
salt deposits, use an LCD cleaner,
wiping slowly with tissue paper so as
to dissolve the dirt or salt. Change
paper frequently so the salt or dirt
will not scratch the LCD. Do not use
solvents such as thinner, acetone or
benzene for cleaning.
Ground terminal
Check for tight connection
and corrosion.
Clean or replace ground wire as
necessary.
7-1
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.2
Replacement of Fuse
The fuse on the power cable protects the equipment from reverse polarity of the
ship’s mains and equipment fault. If the fuse blows, find out the cause before
replacing it. Use the correct fuse (10A for 12 V, 5A for 24 V). Using the wrong
fuse will damage the equipment and void the warranty.
CAUTION
Use the proper fuse.
Use of a wrong fuse can cause fire or
damage the equipment.
7.3
Replacement of Batteries
Battery on circuit board
A battery fitted on a circuit board inside the display unit preserves data when the
equipment is turned off, and its life is about three years. When its voltage is low
the battery icon ( ) appears at the top of the display. When the icon appears,
contact your dealer to request replacement of the battery.
Parts Name
Lithium battery
Type
Code No.
CR2450-F2 ST2L
000-144-941
Batteries in remote controller
The remote controller has two AA batteries. If the distance from which the
remote controller can be operated has decreased, change the battery.
Note: Replace all batteries together. Do not mix old and new batteries.
WARNING
Ensure battery polarity is correct.
Wrong polarity may cause the batteries to explode. 7-2
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.4
Simple Troubleshooting
This section provides simple troubleshooting procedures which the user can
follow to restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation do not
attempt to check inside the unit. Any trouble should be referred to a qualified
technician.
7.4.1
General
General troubleshooting
If…
you cannot turn on the
power
Then…
• check for blown fuse.
• check that the power connector is firmly fastened.
• check for corrosion on the power cable connector.
• check for damaged power cable.
• check battery for proper voltage output (10.8 to 31.2 V).
there is no response
when a key is pressed
7.4.2
• turn off and on the power. If there still is no response the key may
be faulty. Request service.
Plotter
Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.
Plotter troubleshooting
If…
position is not fixed
within three minutes
Then…
check that antenna connector is firmly fastened.
check number of satellites received, on the GPS status display.
(See page 7-11.) There should be three or more.
check that the correct geodetic chart system is selected, on the
GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
enter position offset, on the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
track is not being plotted. (“H” icon appears at the top of the
display.) Press the TRACK HALT soft key on the TRACKS &
MARKS CONTROL menu to start plotting again.
check that correct magnetic variation is entered, on the GENERAL
SETUP menu.
check that LORAN C (or DECCA) is selected at TD DISPLAY on
the GENERAL SETUP menu. Also, check that proper Loran C
(Decca) chains codes are entered, on the TD SETUP menu.
•
•
position is wrong
•
the track is not plotted
•
•
the bearing is wrong
•
Loran C (or Decca)
TDs do not appear
•
Loran C (or Decca)
TDs are wrong
the ship’s speed
indication is not zero
after the ship is
stopped
• enter TD offset on the TD SETUP menu.
• try to decrease speed/course smoothing, on the GPS SENSOR
SETTINGS menu.
7-3
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.4.3
Radar
Requires a network radar.
Radar troubleshooting
If…
But…
you pressed the
[POWER/BRILL] key
and the RADAR soft
key to show the radar
picture
picture does not appear
marks, legends
appear
no echo appears
the picture is not
updated or it freezes
Then…
• check that the antenna cable is
firmly fastened.
• check that radar source is correct.
—
• check Tx fuse in the power cable.
If it is blown, replace it.
• check antenna cable.
• for freeze up, turn the display unit
off and on again.
tuning is adjusted
sensitivity is poor
• magnetron may need to be
replaced. Contact your dealer.
the range is changed
radar picture does not change
• try to hit the [+] and [-] keys again.
• turn the display unit off and on
again.
there is poor
discrimination in range
—
• adjust A/C SEA.
the true motion
presentation is not
working properly
—
• reselect true motion mode.
range rings are not
displayed
—
7-4
• check if heading and speed data
are input.
• hit the RADAR DISPLY and
RINGS soft keys to display them.
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.4.4
Sounder
Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N.
Sounder troubleshooting
If…
you selected a
sounder display with
the DISP key
But…
no sounder display appears
Then…
• check that the network sounder’s
signal cable is firmly fastened.
• check that the network sounder is
plugged in. The LED of the
network sounder should flash
every second.
• check that sounder source is
correct.
marks and
characters appear
picture does not appear
• check for loosened transducer
connector.
picture appears
zero line does not appear
• the picture is shifted. Confirm the
shift setting
picture sensitivity is
too low
—
• check gain setting, if using manual
operation.
• marine life or air bubbles may be
clinging to transducer face.
• bottom may be too soft to return a
suitable echo.
the depth indication
is not displayed
—
• adjust gain and range to display
the bottom echo (in reddish brown
on the color model), if you are
using the manual sounder mode.
noise or interference
shows on the display
—
• check to be sure the transducer
cable is not near ship’s engine.
• check the ground.
• other video sounders of the same
frequency as yours may be
operating near you.
the water
temperature graph
appears
data is wrong
• check that sensor cable is tightly
fastened.
7-5
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.5
Diagnostics
This paragraph provides the procedures for testing the equipment for proper
operation. Four tests are provided: Memory I/O test, Keyboard test, Remote
controller test, and Test pattern.
7.5.1
Memory I/O test
The memory I/O test provides for individual testing of the display unit, GPS
Receiver GP-310B/320B, Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N and ARP,
displaying program number and checking for proper operation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
Press the MEMORY I/O TEST soft key.
MEMORY
I/O TST
DISPLAY UNIT TEST
GPS SENSOR TEST*
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
ARP TEST***
RETURN
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N.
*** = Requires ARP-equipped Model
1800/1900 series network radar.
Memory I/O test menu
6. Then, press appropriate soft key to start a diagnostic test.
7-6
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
Display unit test
Press the DISPLAY UNIT TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test
the display unit. The equipment displays program version number and checks
devices. Results for device checks are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any
NG, request service. A test connector is required to check ports. “ - - “ shown
when no test connector is connected. Chart number shown for C-MAP cards
only. Press the RETURN soft key to return the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. See description at right.
ROM1, 2
: OK
ROM3
: OK
SDRAM
: OK
SRAM
: OK
INT. BATTERY
: OK
PORT
NMEA IN/OUT
: -NMEA IN
: -RS232
: -HEADING
: -NETWORK
: -CHART NUMBER :
Machine Status +115
GD-1700
FURUNO/NAVIONICS model:
0359710XX
C-MAP model: 03591700XX
GD-1700C
FURUNO/NAVIONICS model:
03591730XX
C-MAP model: 03591720XX
GD-1710C
FURUNO/NAVIONICS model:
03591970XX
C-MAP model: 03591970XX
XX = Program Version No.
Display unit test results
GPS sensor test
Press the GPS SENSOR TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test
the GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B. The equipment displays GPS receiver
program version number, and checks the GPS receiver for proper operation,
displaying OK or NG (No Good) as the result. For NG, request service. Press the
RETURN soft key to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
For GP-310B
(4850238XX: for GP-320B)
PROGRAM No. 4850218XX
GPS UNIT : OK
Machine Status + 115
XX = Program Version No.
GPS receiver test results
7-7
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
Network sounder test (Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N)
Press the NETWORK SOUNDER TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST
menu to test the Network Sounder ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N. The equipment
displays network sounder program version number, checks the ROM and RAM,
and displays water temperature (appropriate sensor required) and depth. The
results of the ROM and RAM check are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any
NG, request service. Press the RETURN soft key to return to the MEMORY I/O
TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. 02523060XX
ROM 1, 2
: OK
RAM
: OK
TEMPERATURE
: 77°F
DEPTH
: 4000ft
Machine Status +115
XX = Program Version No.
For ETR-6/10N
(0252310XX.XX for ETR-30N)
Network sounder test results
ARP test (Requires ARP pcb in Model 1800/1900 series network radar)
The ARP test is mainly provided for the service technician. Press the ARP TEST
soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the ARP. The results of the
ROM and RAM check are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request
service. Press the RETURN soft key to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. 18590271XX
ARP ROM
: OK
ARP RAM
: OK
SPEED
: OK 12.3kt
COURSE
: OK 359.9°
TRIGGER
: OK
VIDEO
: OK
BEARING PULSE : OK
HEADING PULSE : OK
MINIMUM HIT
: 0003
SCAN-TIME
: 0250
MANUAL ACQ : 00
AUTO ACQ
: 00
FE-DATA1
: 000
FE-DATA2
: 000
Machine Status +115
XX = Program Version No.
ARP test results
7-8
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.5.2
Test pattern
The test pattern test checks the display for proper display of colors
(GD-1700C/1710C) or tones (GD-1700).
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
Press the TEST PATTERN soft key to show the test pattern.
BLACK
BLUE
GREEN
GREEN
RED
RETURN
WHITE
RETURN
RETURN
PRESS ENTER KNOB TO CHANGE
PATTERN.
GD-1700C/1710C
GD-1700
Test patterns
6. For the GD-1700C/1710C, push the [ENTER] knob consecutively to show
white, red, green, blue and black colors in that sequence.
7. Press the RETURN soft key.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
7-9
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.5.3
Keyboard, remote controller test
The keyboard test checks the controls on the display unit and remote controller
for proper operation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the [MENU] key to show the menu.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
Press the KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST soft key.
PUSH "CLEAR" KEY
3 TIMES TO RETURN
K-BOARD
TEST
For Remote Controller
For Display Unit
I/R REMOTE CODE
Screen for testing keyboard, remote controller
6. Operate each control on the keyboard and remote controller one by one. A
key is functioning properly if its on-screen location “fills” in black (color
model) or gray (monochrome model) when the key is pressed. For the
[ENTER] knob, rotate it to show X-Y position; push it to confirm its function.
7. Press the [CLEAR] key on the display unit or remote controller three times to
escape from the test.
8. Press the [MENU] key to close the menu.
7-10
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.6
GPS Status Display
The GPS status display provides data about the GPS satellites. It is available
with connection of the GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B or a GPS navigator
outputting the data sentence GSA or GSV.
1. Press the [MENU] key.
2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and GPS SENSOR
SETTINGS soft keys to display the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
3. Press the GPS STATUS soft key.
4. Press the RETURN soft key to quit the GPS status display.
Estimated position of satellite in the sky.
Satellites used for fixing position are circled.
N
23:59:59
FEB 27 2001
21
12
26
23
WAAS satellite:
Only when GP-320B
is connected.
WAAS satellite:
Only when GP-320B
is connected.
30
29
W
GPS 3D
20
28 E
05
W
SAT
No. 30
23
12
29
27
01
17
26
05
20
21
30
28
27
17
S
Date and time
GPS fix state
DOP
1.2
DOP value
ALT
22 m
GPS antenna height
SNR
40
50
RETURN
Receive signal level
Bars show satellite
signal levels. Satellites
whose signal level
extends past 40 are
used to fix position.
124
GPS status display
7-11
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.7
Clearing Memories
Your equipment has a memory for each of the plotter, radar and sounder
sections. These memories can be cleared to start operation with default settings.
The following data are not cleared: Heading adjustment, timing adjustment, MBS
level, tuning point, tuning indication (short, medium, long), video level, dead
sector, antenna height, STC curve, antenna type, on time, tx time.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press the [MENU] key to open the menu.
Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
Press the MEMORY CLEAR soft key.
DISPLAY UNIT
NO
GPS SENSOR
NO
NETWORK SOUNDER
NO
MEMORY
CLEAR
EDIT
RETURN
Memory clear menu
6. Use the cursor pad to choose the memory to clear.
7. Press the EDIT soft key.
8. Use the cursor pad to select YES, then press the ENTER soft key. One of the
following displays appears depending on the selection made at step 6.
ALL SETTNGS EXCEPT
SNDR ARE RESET TO
DEFAULT. ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
BEGIN COLD START
TO CLEAR GPS
MEMORY. ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Display Unit Clear
GPS Receiver Clear
Windows for clearing memory
9. Push the [ENTER] knob to clear memory selected.
10. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
11. Turn the power off and on again.
7-12
SOUNDER WILL BE
SET TO DEFAULT.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Network Sounder Clear
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
7.8
Error Messages
In addition to alarm messages your equipment also displays error messages.
Error messages
Error Message
Meaning
Connection with the ETR was
cut.
Network sounder disconnected.
Connection with the RADAR
was cut.
Radar disconnected.
Low Voltage! Internal Battery
Voltage of battery on circuit
board in display unit is low.
No bearing pulse detected.
No bearing pulse from radar
antenna.
Check antenna cable.
No GPS fix!
GPS navigator is turned off or
no GPS position data.
There may be obstacles
around GPS antenna.
No position data.
An error occurs on
GP-310B/320B.
Disconnect GPS cable from
the display unit, and then
contact your dealer.
No heading pulse detected.
Heading data missing!
No heading pulse
Remedy
• Check that display unit
where the sounder is
connected is turned on.
• Check network sounder’s
cabling.
• Check that display unit
where the radar is
connected is turned on.
• Check antenna cable.
Have a qualified technician
replace the battery.
Check heading sensor.
Check heading cable.
7-13
7. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
This page is intentionally left blank.
7-14
APPENDIX
Menu Overview
MENU key
Plotter
CHART SETUP
MENU Key
CHART OFFSET (offsets chart position.)
TRACKS &
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP (ON, OFF)
MARKS
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)*
CONTROL
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY (ON, OFF)
TARGET TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN , LIGHT BLUE, PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)*
INTERVAL (TIME, DISTANCE)
TIME INTERVAL (0 - 99m59s, 10 seconds)
DISTANCE INTERVAL (0 - 99.99nm/km/sm, 0.10 nm)
MEMORY (TRACK & MARK) (0 - 8000 points, 2,000 points)
TRACK soft key (RESUME, HALT)
* = Denotes GD-1700C/1710C only.
ERASE T & M soft key
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR*
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
MARK SETUP soft key
MARKS/LINES COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)*
MARKS SHAPE ( ¡
LINES STYLE ( ,
✕
,
)
,
= Default setting
)
MARKS SIZE (LARGE, SMALL)
CHART
LAT/LON GRID (ON, OFF, RED*, YELLOW*, GREEN*, LIGHT BLUE*, PURPLE*, BLUE*, WHITE)*
DETAILS
TEXT INFORMATION (ON, OFF)
(FURUNO,
NavChartsTM)
WAYPOINT NAMES (ON, OFF)
WAYPOINTS (LARGE, SMALL, OFF)
CHART BORDER LINES (ON, OFF)
LANDMASS (BRT, DIM, OFF, RED*, YELLOW*, GREEN*, LIGHT BLUE*, PURPLE*, BLUE*, WHITE)*
BACKGROUND (WHITE, BLACK)*
NAVAIDS (ON, OFF)
LIGHT SECTOR INFO (ON, OFF)
OTHER SYMBOLS (ON, OFF, RED*, YELLOW*, GREEN*, LIGHT BLUE*, PURPLE*, BLUE*, WHITE*)
MARKS SIZE (LARGE, SMALL)
CNTOUR LINE soft key
DEPTH < 10m (ON, OFF, RED*)
DEPTH = 10m (ON, OFF, YELLOW*)
DEPTH > 10m (ON, OFF, LIGHT BLUE*)
DEPTH INFORMATION (ON, OFF, RED*)
* Colors: RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE
1
2
A-1
APPENDIX
2
1
Page 1
CHART
DETAILS
WAYPOINT (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
(C-MAP
LAT/LON GRID (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
chart)
CHART BORDER LINE (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
WAYPOINT NAME (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
BACKGROUND (WHITE, BLACK)
PORT & SERVICE (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
ATTENTION AREA (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, PLOTTER CONTOUR*, OFF)
NAV LANE (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
* = Denotes GD-1700C/1710C only.
LIGHT (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, PLOT/NO SECTOR*, OFF)
BUOY & BEACON (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
SIGNAL (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
Page 2
DETPH INFO soft key
BATHYMETRIC LINE
(ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*,
PLOTTER*, OFF)
SPOT SOUNDING
(ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*,
PLOTTER*, OFF)
BOTTOM TYPE
(ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*,
PLOTTER*, OFF)
CONTOUR SHADING (33 ft)
SPOT SOUNDING RANGE (0-33 ft)
CARTOGRAPHIC OBJECT (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
PLACE NAME (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
COMPASS (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
TIDE & CURRENT (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
NATURAL FEATURE (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
RIVER & LAKE (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
CULTURAL FEATURE (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
LANDMARK (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
CHART GENERATION (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
NEW OBJECT (ON, PLOTTER/OVERLAY*, PLOTTER*, OFF)
COMPLEX OBJECT ICON (SINGLE, MULTIPLE)
INFORMATION LEVEL (BASIC, DETAILED)
DEPTH INFO soft key (See left-hand margin.)
PLOTTER
WAYPOINT SWITCHING (PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL, MANUAL)
SETUP
COURSE VECTOR (VECTOR, LINE, OFF)
SET GOTO METHOD (1 POINT, 35 POINTS, 35PTS/PORT SVC)
QP (EXT WPT (RMB), INTERNAL)
D. BOX soft key
(DATA BOX SIZE SMALL, LARGE; POSITION, WAYPOINT, COG, SOG, STW, BEARING,
WAYPOINTS/
RANGE, TIME TO GO, ETA, TEMPERATURE, DEPTH, TRIP LOG, DATE, TIME, WIND)
GOTO
WAYPOINTS
LOCAL LIST
ROUTES
ROUTES
ALPHANUMERIC LIST
NEW WPT
WAYPOINT BY CURSOR
EDIT WPT
WAYPOINT BY RNG & BRG
ERASE WPT
GOTO
NEW WPT
NEW ROUTE
NEW WPT
EDIT ROUTE
START POINT
ERASE ROUTE
LOG
(Destination
is required)
RESTART
STOP/RELEASE
RVRSE/FORWARD
SPEED (Speed for ETA: GPS or manual input (0-99 kt))
COORD TYPE
CREATE
NEW (BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST, MANUAL)
VOYAGE-
SELECT ROUTE
BASED
ROUTE
FUNCTION
KEY SETUP*
3
A-2
SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5
(OFF, ADD NEW WPT, MOVE WPT, RULER, GOTO WPT, GOTO ROUTE, EDIT MK/LINE,
TRACK ON/OFF, TTM ON/OFF, DEL TGT TRK, ALPHA LIST, LOCAL LIST, ROUTE LIST,
D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL)
(Assigns function of each plotter function key.)
* Defaut settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, TRACK ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 2, EDIT MK/LINE;
SOFT KEY 3, RULER; SOFT KEY 4, ADD NEW WPT;
SOFT KEY 5, ALPHA LIST
APPENDIX
3
SYSTEM
GENERAL
KEY BEEP (ON, OFF)
CONFIGURATION
SETUP
LANGUAGE (ENGLISH, OTHERS)
RANGE UNIT
Page 1
(nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm&yd, kt; nm&m, kt; km&m, km/h; sm&yd,
mph)
TEMPERATURE UNIT (°F, °C)
DEPTH UNIT (m, ft, fa, pb)
TEMPERATURE SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
DEPTH SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
RESET TRIP LOG (YES, NO)
SPEED SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
LAT/LON DISPLAY (DD° MM. MM', DD° MM. MMM', DD° MM. MMMM',
DD° MM' SS.S")
TD DISPLAY (LORAN C, DECCA)
Page 2
SPEED DISPLAY (SOG, STW)
POSITION DISPLAY (LAT/LON, TD)
TIME DISPLAY (12 HOURS, 24 HOURS)
INFRARED REMOTE MODE (A, B, C, D)
RANGE & BEARING MODE
(GREAT CIRCLE, RHUMB LINE)
BEARING READOUT (TRUE, MAGNETIC)
MAGNETIC VARIATION (MANUAL, AUTO 07.0°W)
DAISPLAY MODE (DAY, NIGHT)** = GD-1700 only.
NAV
NAV
POSITION SOURCE
OPTION
SOURCE
(FURUNO BB GPS, GP, LC, ALL)
SETTINGS
SPEED AVERAGING (0-9999 seconds,
60 seconds)
LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13:30-+13:30 hr, 00:00)
TEMP CALIBRATION (-40°F - +40°F, 0°F)
DEPTH CALIBRATION (-15 - +90 ft, 0 ft)
GPS
LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13:30-+13:30, 00:00)
SENSOR
GEODETIC DATUM (WGS-84, WGS-72, OTHERS: See page A-9)
SETTINGS
POSITION SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds, 000 seconds)
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds, 005 seconds)
GPS SPEED AVERAGE (0 - 999 seconds, 60 seconds)
LATITUDE OFFSET (0 - 9.999’N(S), 0.000'N)
LONGITUDE OFFSET (0 - 9.999'E(W), 0.000'E)
DISABLE SATELLITE (Max. 3)
LATITUDE (45°35.000'N)
LONGITUDE (125°00.00'W)
ANTENNA HEIGHT (0 - 999 m, 5 m)
GPS FIX MODE (2D/3D, 3D)
COLD START (YES, NO)
GPS STATUS soft key
(Displays status of GPS satellites.)
TD SETUP
GRI (9940: 11-27 (US west coast))
CORRECTION 1 (-999.9-+999.9 µs, 000.0 µs)
CORRECTION 2 (-999.9-+999.9 µs, 000.0 µs)
CHAIN (01: R-G (South Baltic))
4
CORRECTION 1 (-99.99-+99.99 µs, 00.00 lane)
CORRECTION 2 (-99.99-+99.99 µs, 00.00 lane)
A-3
APPENDIX
4
PORT
SETUP
SYSTEM
SETUP
GPS/NMEA
FURUNO GPS SENSOR
PORT
(YES, NO)
OUTPUT FORMAT
(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)
LAT/LON FORMAT
(DD° MM. MM'
DD° MM. MMM'
DD° MM. MMMM')
OUTPUT DESTINATION
(YES, NO)
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
NMEA PORT
FURUNO GPS SENSOR
(YES, NO)
OUTPUT FORMAT
(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)
LAT/LON FORMAT
(DD° MM. MM'
DD° MM. MMM'
DD° MM. MMMM')
OUTPUT DESTINATION
(YES, NO)
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
PC/NMEA/
OUTPUT FORMAT
EXT. BUZZ
(NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)
PORT
BAUD RATE
(4800, 9600, 19200
(bps))
BIT LENGTH (7 bits, 8
bits)
STOP BIT (1 bit, 2 bits)
PARITY
(EVEN, ODD, NONE)
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK
(Select data sentences (see * below) to
output through network. All sentences
are off in the default setting.)
5
6
* = AAM, APB, BOD, BWR(BWC)#1, DPT(DBT)#2, GGA, GLL, GTD,
MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC, VHW, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA, HDT, HDG, MWV
#1= BWR for rhumb line, BWC for great circle
#2 = DBT for NMEA Ver. 1.5; DPT for NMEA Ver. 2.0
QP (EXT WPT (RMB), INTERNAL)
A-4
APPENDIX
5
MEMORY
I/O TEST
TEST &
CLEAR
DISPLAY UNIT TEST
GPS SENSOR TEST*
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
ARP TEST***
KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST
(Tests keyboard and remote controller.)
TEST PATTERN
(Displays test pattern.)
MEMORY
CLEAR
DISPLAY UNIT (YES, NO)
GPS SENSOR (YES, NO)*
NETWORK SOUNDER (YES, NO)**
HOT PAGE
HOT PAGE SETUP
& NAV DISP
(Sets up hot pages 1-5.)
SETUP
NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP
(Configures nav data displays.)
SIMULATION
RADAR
SETUP
(SIMULATION 1, SIMULATION 2, LIVE)
PLOTTER (SIMULATION, LIVE)
SOUNDER (SIMULATION 1, SIMULATION 2, LIVE)
SPEED (0.0-99.9 kt, 0.0 kt)
COURSE (8 FIGURE, DIRECTION 0.0°, 0.0-359.9°)
LATITUDE (85°0.0’N-85°0.0’, 45°35.000’N)
LONGITUDE (180°0.0’E-180°0.0’W, 125°00.000’W)
START DATA & TIME (00:00 01. APR. 00)
RADAR SIMULATION DATA (YES, NO)
* = Requires GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B.
** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N.
*** = Requires ARP-equipped Model 1800/1900 series network radar.
6
DATA
UPLOAD/
DOWNLOAD WPT/ROUTE TO PC
TRANSFER
DOWNLOAD
(WAYPOINTS & ROUTES, MARKS & LINES)
DATA
UPLOAD WPT/ROUTE FROM PC
(WAYPOINTS & ROUTES, MARKS & LINES)
SELECT BPS soft key
4800
9600
19200 (bps)
SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES, WAYPOINTS &
ROUTES, SETTING DATA)
LOAD DATA IN MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES, WAYPOINTS &
ROUTES, SETTING DATA)
RECEIVE YEOMAN DATA (Receives waypoint data
from Yeoman.)
RECEIVE DATA
HOST NAME
VIA NETWORK
MARKS & LINES (OFF, ON)
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES (OFF, ON)
A-5
APPENDIX
Radar
MENU Key
RADAR
EBL REFERENCE (TRUE, RELATIVE)
DISPLAY SETUP
CURSOR POSITION (LAT/LON, TD, RNG&BRG-REL, RNG&BRG-TRUE)
TUNING (AUTO, MAN)
TX SECTOR BLANKING (ON (FROM 0.0°, SECTOR 001°)), OFF)
NOISE REJECTION (OFF, LOW, HIGH)
BACKGROUND COLOR (BLACK/GREEN, BLACK/RED, BLUE/WHITE,
DARK BLUE/WHITE, WHITE/GREEN)*
ECHO COLOR (YELLOW, GREEN, MULTI-COLOR)*
WATCHMAN TIME (5, 10, 20 (minutes))
* = GD-1700C/1710C only.
RANGE UNIT (nm, km, sm)
D. BOX soft key (Same items as on plotter menu. See page
A-2.)
RADAR
Not used.
RANGE
SETUP
ARP SETUP
(Requires ARP
circuit board in
Model 1800/1900
series network
radar.)
ARP TARGET INFO (INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP, OFF)
CANCEL ALL TARGETS (YES, NO)
ARP VECTOR MODE (RELATIVE, TRUE)
ARP VECTOR TIME (30 seconds; 1, 3, 6, 15, 30 minutes)
HISTORY INTERVAL (OFF, 30 seconds; 1, 2, 3, 6 minutes)
CPA (OFF, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 nm)
TCPA (30 seconds; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12 minutes)
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA (ON, OFF)
TARGET ID NUMBER (ON, OFF)
FUNCTION
SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5
KEY SETUP#
(OFF, HDG LINE OFF, MODE, GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN, FTC (Model 1700
series NavNet radar only), ECHO STRETCH, PULSE LENGTH, ZOOM,
OFFCENTER, ECHO TRAIL, RINGS ON/OFF, TLL OUTPUT, GUARD
ALARM, EBL, VRM, TTM ON/OFF, WPT ON/OFF, WATCHMAN,
ACQUISITION (ARP-equipped Model 1800/1900 series NavNet radar only),
STBY/TX, RADAR SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL)
# Default settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, HDG LINE OFF; SOFT KEY 2, RINGS ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 3, ECHO TRAIL;
SOFT KEY 4, OFFCENTER, SOFT KEY 5, STBY/TX
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page A-3.)
A-6
APPENDIX
Sounder
MENU Key
SOUNDER
NOISE LIMITER (OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH) * = GD-1700C/1710C only
MENU
CLUTTER (0-16, AUTO)
WHITE MARKER (1-8 (8 color), 1-16 (16 color), OFF)*
ZOOM MARKER (ON, OFF)
SL1-SL2: Monochrome
SL1-SL3: 8 color
SL1-SL6: 16 color
HUE (1-9, 1)*
SIGNAL LEVEL (OFF, SL1, SL2, SL3, SL4, SL5, SL6)
PICTURE ADVANCE (2/1, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, STOP)
TEMPERATURE GRAPH (ON, OFF)
PRR LEVEL (0-20, SPD SENSING PRR, 20)
D. BOX soft key (Same items as on plotter menu. See page A-2.)
SOUNDER
FISH ALARM LEVEL (HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW)
SYSTEM SETUP
TRANSMISSION (OFF, ON)
TVG HF (0 - 9, 3)
TVG LF (0 - 9, 3)
ECHO OFFSET HF (-50 - +50, 0)
STC-HF(0-10, 0)
STC-LF (0-10, 0)
FREQ. ADJ.-HF (-10.0-+10.0, 0)
FREQ. ADJ.-LF (-10.0-+10.0, 0)
TARGET ECHO (NORMAL, SURFACE)
ECHO OFFSET LF (-50 - +50, 0)
BOTTOM LEVEL HF (-100 - +100, 0)
BOTTOM LEVEL LF (-100 - +100, 0)
KP PULSE (INTERNAL, EXTERNAL)
SMOOTHING (OFF, SM1, SM2, SM3, SM4)
TLL OUTPUT (ON, OFF)
SENSOR SETUP soft key
SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50%, 0%)
TEMP. CALIBRATION (-40°F - +40°F, 0°F)
DEPTH CALIBRATION ( -15 - +90 ft, 0 ft)
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION (-500 - +500m/s, 0 m/s)
SOUNDER
RANGE 1 - RANGE 8**
RANGE
ZOOM RANGE (2-120 m, 10 m; 7-400 ft, 30 ft; 1-60 fa, 5 fa; 1-70 P/B, 6 P/B)
SETUP
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE (3 m, 6 m; 10 ft, 20 ft; 2 fa, 3 fa; 2 P/B, 3 P/B)
FUNCTION KEY
SOFT KEY 1- SOFT KEY 5
SETUP#
(OFF, AUTO MODE, GAIN-HF, GAIN-LF, SHIFT, NOISE LIMITER, CLUTTER,
WHITE MARKER*, HUE*, SIGNAL LEVEL, PICTURE ADV, TEMP. GRAPH,
TVG-HF, TVG-LF, OFFSET-HF, OFFSET-LF, SMOOTHING, ZOOM RANGE,
B/L RANGE, TLL OUTPUT, SNDR SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE
CNTRL)
(Assign function of echo sounder function key.)
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page A-3.)
** = Default sounder ranges
Range 1 Range 2
5m
15 ft
3 fa
3 P/B
10 m
30 ft
5 fa
5 P/B
Range 3
Range 4
Range 5
20 m
60 ft
10 fa
10 P/B
40 m
120 ft
20 fa
30 P/B
80 m
200 ft
40 fa
50 P/B
Range 6
150 m
400 ft
80 fa
100 P/B
Range 7
300 m
1000 ft
150 fa
200 P/B
Range 8
ETR-6/10N
ETR-30N
1200 m
4000 ft
650 fa
700 P/B
1500 m
4500 ft
900 fa
900 P/B
# Default settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, TLL OUTPUT; SOFT KEY 2, CLUTTER; SOFT KEY 3, SIGNAL LEVEL:
SOFT KEY 4, NOISE LIMITER, SOFT KEY 5, PICTURE ADV
A-7
APPENDIX
ALARM key
Radar Alarms
ALARM key
SET GUARD 1 (ERASE GUARD 1)
SET GUARD 2 (ERASE GUARD 2)
Plotter Alarms
ALARM key
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)
ARRIVAL ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm))
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.010 nm(km/sm))
PROXIMITY ALARM (ON, OFF)
XTE ALARM (ON, OFF, default range: 0.050 nm(km/sm))
SPEED ALARM (WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, OFF)
TRIP ALARM (ON, OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
Sounder Alarms
ALARM key
AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)
FISH ALARM (ON, OFF)
FISH ALARM (B/L) (ON, OFF)
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
A-8
APPENDIX
Geodetic Chart List
001: WGS84
002: WGS72
003: TOKYO : Mean Value (Japan, Korea, and Okinawa)
004: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Mean Value (CONUS)
005: EUROPEAN 1950 : Mean Value
006: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 : Australia and Tasmania
Island
007: ADINDAN : Mean Value (Ethiopia and Sudan)
008: : Ethiopia
009: : Mall
010: : Senegal
011: : Sudan
012: AFG : Somalia
013: AIN EL ABD 1970 : Bahrain Island
014: ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965 : Cocos Island
015: ARC 1950 : Mean Value
016: : Botswana
017: : Lesotho
018: : Malawi
019: : Swaziland
020: : Zaire
021: : Zambia
022: : Zimbabwe
023: ARC 1960 : Mean Value (Kenya, Tanzania)
024: : Kenya
025: : Tanzania
026: ASCENSION ISLAND 1958 : Ascension Island
027: ASTRO BEACON "E" : Iwo Jima Island
028: ASTRO B4 SOR. ATOLL : Tem Island
029: ASTRO POS 71/4 : St. Helena Island
030: ASTRONOMIC STATION 1952 : Marcus Island
031: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1966 : Australia and Tasmania
Island
032: BELLEVUE (IGN) : Efate and Erromango Islands
033: BERMUDA 1957 : Bermuda Islands
034: BOGOTA OBSERVATORY : Colombia
035: CAMPO INCHAUSPE : Argentina
036: CANTON ISLAND 1966 : Phoenix Islands
037: CAPE : South Africa
038: CAPE CANAVERAL : Mean Value (Florida and Bahama
Islands)
039: CARTHAGE : Tunisia
040: CHATHAM 1971 : Chatham Island (New Zealand)
041: CHUA ASTRO : Paraguay
042: CORREGO ALEGRE : Brazil
043: DJAKARTA (BATAVIA) : Sumatra Island (Indonesia)
044: DOS 1968 : Gizo Island (New Georgia Island)
045: EASTER ISLAND 1967 : Easter Island
046: EUROPEAN 1950 (Cont'd) : Western Europe
047: : Cyprus
048: : Egypt
049: : England, Scotland, Channel, and Shetland Islands
050: : England,Ireland, Scotland, and Shetland Islands
051: : Greece
052: : Iran
053: : Italy Sardinia
054: : Italy Sicily
055: : Norway and Finland
056: : Portugal and Spain
057: EUROPEAN 1979 : Mean Value
058: GANDAJIKA BASE : Republic of Maldives
059: GEODETIC DATUM 1949 : New Zealand
060: GUAM 1963 : Guam Island
061: GUX 1 ASTRO : Guadalcanal Island
062: HJORSEY 1955 : Iceland
063: HONG KONG 1963 : Hong Kong
064: INDIAN : Thailand and Vietnam
065: : Bangladesh, India, and Nepal
066: IRELAND 1956 : Ireland
067: ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969 : Diego Garcia
068: JHONSTON ISLAND 1961 : Johnston Island
069: KANDAWALA : Sri Lanka
070: KERGUELEN ISLAND : Kerguelen Island
071: KERTAU 1948 : West Malaysia and Singapore
072: LA REUNION : Mascarene Island
073: L.C. 5 ASTRO : Cayman Brac Island
074: LIBERIA 1964 : Liberia
075: LUZON : Philippines (Excluding Mindanao Island)
076: : Mindanao Island
077: MAHE 1971 : Mahe Island
078: MARCO ASTRO : Salvage Islands
079: MASSAWA : Eritrea (Ethiopia)
080: MERCHICH : Morocco
081: MIDWAY ASTRO 1961 : Midway Island
082: MINNA : Nigeria
083: NAHRWAN : Masirah Island(Oman)
084: : United Arab Emirates
085: : Saudi Arabia
086: NAMIBIA : Namibia
087: MAPARIMA, BWI : Trinidad and Tobago
088: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Western United States
089: : Eastern United States
090: : Alaska
091: : Bahamas (Excluding San Salvador Island)
092: : Bahamas San Salvador Island
093: : Canada (Including Newfoundland Island)
094: : Alberta and British Columbia
095: : East Canada
096: : Manitoba and Ontario
097: : Northwest Territories and Saskatchewan
098: : Yukon
099: : Canal Zone
100: : Caribbean
101: : Central America
102: : Cuba
103: : Greenland
104: : Mexico
105: NORTH AMERICAN 1983 : Alaska
106: : Canada
107: : CONUS
108: : Mexico, Central America
109: OBSERVATORIO 1966 : Corvo and Flores Islands
(Azores)
110: OLD EGYPTIAN 1930 : Egypt
111: OLD HAWAIIAN : Mean Value
112: : Hawaii
113: : Kaual
114: : Maui
115: : Oahu
116: OMAN : Oman
117: ORDNANCE SURVEY OF GREAT BRITAIN 1936 :
Mean Value
118: : England
119: : England, Isle of Man, and Wales
120: : Scotland and Shetland Islands
121: : Wales
122: PICO DE LAS NIVIES : Canary Islands
123: PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 : Pitcairn Island
124: PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 : South Chile
(near 53°S)
125: PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 : Mean Value
126: : Bolivia
127: : Chile Northern Chie (near 19°S)
128: : Chile Southern Chile (near 43°S)
129: : Colombia
130: : Ecuador
131: : Guyana
132: : Peru
133: : Venezuela
134: PUERTO RICO : Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands
135: QATAR NATIONAL : Qatar
136: QORNOQ : South Greenland
137: ROME 1940 : Sardinia Islands
138: SANTNA BRAZ : Sao Maguel, Santa Maria Islands
(Azores)
139: SANTO (DOS) : Espirito Santo Island
140: SAPPER HILL 1943 : East Falkland Island
141: SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 : Mean Value
142: : Argentina
143: : Bolivia
144: : Brazil
145: : Chile
146: : Colombia
147: : Ecuador
148: : Guyana
149: : Paraguay
150: : Peru
151: : Trinidad and Tobago
152: : Venezuela
153: SOUTH ASIA : Singapore
154: SOUTHEAST BASE : Porto Santo and Medeira Islands
155: SOUTHWEST BASE : Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge,
and Terceira Islands
156: TIMBALAI 1948 : Brunel and East Malaysia (Sarawak and
Sadah)
157: TOKYO : Japan
158: : Korea
159: : Okinawa
160: TRISTAN ASTRO 1968 : Tristan da Cunha
161: VITI LEVU 1916 : Viti Levu Island (Fiji Islands)
162: WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 : Marshall Islands
163: ZANDERIJ : Suriname
164: BUKIT RIMPAH : Bangka and Belitung Islands
(Indonesia)
165: CAMP AREA ASTRO : Camp Mcmurdo Area, Antarctica
166: G. SEGARA : Kalimantan Islands(Indonesia)
167: HERAT NORTH : Afghanistan
168: HU-TZU-SHAN : Taiwan
169: TANANARIVE OBSERVATORY 1925 : Madagascar
170: YACARE : Uruguay
171: RT-90 : Sweden
172 : Pulkovo 1942 : Russia
A-9
APPENDIX
World Time Chart
A-10
APPENDIX
Icons
Icon
Meaning
North marker. Points to North.
Correct chart and suitable scale - full chart reliability.
Chart overenlarged.
• Chart card not inserted.
• Wrong chart card inserted.
• Chart scale too small.
Plotter, radar, sounder alarm setting violated.
Track is not being recorded or plotted.
Chart offset applied.
SA
VE
Voyage-based route is being created.
Latitude and longitude position offset applied.
Voltage of battery on circuit board in display unit is low. Contact your dealer
about replacement.
SI
Simulation mode.
M
A-11
APPENDIX
This page is intentionally left blank.
A-12
SPECIFICATIONS
VIDEO PLOTTER GD-1700
COLOR VIDEO PLOTTER GD-1700C/1710C
1
DISPLAY UNIT
1.1
Indication System
1.2
1.3
GD-1700:
PPI Daylight display, raster scan, 4 tones monochrome LCD
GD-1700C/1710C:
PPI Daylight display, raster scan, color LCD
Display
GD-1700:
7 inch rectangular monochrome LCD, 240(H) x 320(V) dots
GD-1700C:
7 inch rectangular color LCD, 234(H) x 320(V) dots
GD-1710C:
7 inch rectangular color LCD, 480(H) x 640(V) dots
Input Data
IEC 61162-1
Own ship’s position:
GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL
Ship’s speed:
RMC>RMA>VTG>VHW
Bearing (True):
HDT>HDG*1>HDM*1
Course:
RMC>RMA>VTG
Water depth:
DPT>DBT
Wind:
MWV>VWT>VWR
Water Temperature:
MTW
Time:
ZDA
*1
: calculated by magnetic deviation
1.4
Output Data
Alarm signal
12 VDC, 100 mA or less
NMEA 0183 Ver1.5
GGA, GLL, RMA, RMC, GTD, VTG, ZDA (GPS data required)
RMB, WPL, BWC or BWR, APB, AAM, BOD, XTE, VHW, MTW,
DPT or DBT, DBS (ETR required), TTM (ARPA required)
2. PLOTTER FUNCTION
2.1.
Projection
Mercator
2.2.
Usable Area
85 latitude or below
2.3.
Position Indication
Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP or DECCA LOP
2.4.
Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 1,024 nm (at equatorial area)
2.5.
Track Display
Plot interval:
by time (1s to 99m 59s) or
by distance (0 to 99.9 nm)
2.6.
Colors
Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white
2.7.
Memory Capacity
Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points
Quick point: 35 max.
2.8.
Storage Capacity
Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each
SP - 1
E4409S01F
2.9.
MOB
1 point
2.10. Quick Routes
1 course with 35 waypoints max.
2.11. Electronic Chart
FURUNO chart card or NAVIONICS chart card available
C-MAP chart card also available for C-MAP NT Model
2.12. Alarms
Arrival and Anchor watch, Cross track error and proximity
alarms, Ship’s speed in and out alarms, Water temperature,
Bottom alarm, Trip alarm, Fish alarm (ETR required)
3
POWER SUPPLY
3.1
Rated Voltage/Current
GD-1700:
12-24 VDC: 1.4-0.7 A
GD-1700C:
12-24 VDC: 1.7-0.8 A
GD-1710C:
12-24 VDC: 2.1-1.0 A
3.2
Rectifier (PR-62: option) 100/110/115/200/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
4
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
4.1
Ambient Temperature
-15°C to +55°C
4.2
Relative Humidity
93 % or less at +40°C
4.3
Waterproofing
IPX5
4.4
Bearing Vibration
IEC 60945-3rd
5
COATING COLOR
5.1
Display Unit
6
COMPASS SAFE DISTANCE
6.1
Display Unit
N3.0
GD-1700:
Standard: 0.50 m
Steering: 0.35 m
GD-1700C:
Standard: 0.70 m
Steering: 0.45 m
GD-1710C:
Standard: 0.50 m
Steering: 0.30 m
SP - 2
E4409S01F
INDEX
A
A/C RAIN...................................................... 3-5
A/C SEA ....................................................... 3-4
ACQ soft key............................................... 3-35
ALARM key
plotter ..................................................... 2-53
radar....................................................... 3-30
sounder .................................................. 4-20
Alarms
anchor watch .......................................... 2-55
arrival...................................................... 2-54
audio ...................................................... 2-53
bottom .................................................... 4-21
CPA/TCPA .............................................. 3-42
fish.......................................................... 4-21
fish(B/L) .................................................. 4-22
guard ...................................................... 3-30
heading data missing ................................ 3-9
lost target................................................ 3-43
messages (plotter) .................................. 2-60
messages (sounder) ............................... 4-25
proximity ................................................. 2-57
speed...................................................... 2-56
trip .......................................................... 2-58
water temperature................................... 4-23
XTE (cross track error)............................ 2-56
Anchor watch alarm .................................... 2-55
Antenna height (GPS Receiver) .................. 5-20
ARP
acquisition of targets ............................... 3-36
activating ................................................ 3-35
ARP SETUP menu.................................. 3-35
CPA/TCPA alarm..................................... 3-42
data ........................................................ 3-41
deactivating ............................................ 3-35
lost target alarm ...................................... 3-43
past position display................................ 3-40
test ........................................................... 7-8
tracking termination................................. 3-38
vector...................................................... 3-39
Arrival alarm ............................................... 2-54
A-scope display ............................................ 4-7
Audio alarm ................................................ 2-53
Auto course-up mode ................................... 2-8
AUTO S.SPD soft key................................. 3-21
AUTO/D. BOX soft key ................................. 4-9
B
Batteries replacement................................... 7-2
Bearing measurement by EBL .................... 3-15
Bearing reference......................................... 5-3
Bottom alarm.............................................. 4-21
Bottom discrimination display........................ 4-7
Bottom echo............................................... 4-26
Bottom-lock display ...................................... 4-6
Bottom-zoom display .................................... 4-5
Brilliance ...................................................... 1-9
C
CENTER soft key ....................................... 1-15
CHART DETAILS menu................................ 5-8
CHART OFFSET soft key ............................. 5-7
Charts
C-MAP chart attributes ............................5-11
cursor and data display (C-MAP) ............ 2-14
data for aids to navigation....................... 2-12
FURUNO chart attributes.......................... 5-9
icon data (C-MAP).................................. 2-15
icons ...................................................... 2-10
indices.....................................................2-11
inserting ................................................... 1-7
TM
NavCharts chart attributes .................... 5-9
offsetting .................................................. 5-7
port service icons ................................... 2-13
TM
symbols for FURUNO, NavCharts ....... 2-12
tide information (C-MAP) ........................ 2-16
CLEAR ALARM soft key ............................. 4-24
Clutter rejector............................................ 4-14
C-MAP charts
attributes .................................................5-11
cursor and data display........................... 2-14
icon data ................................................ 2-15
tide information....................................... 2-16
CNTOUR LINE soft key .............................. 5-10
Cold start (GPS Receiver) .......................... 5-20
Index-1
INDEX
Colors (GD-1700C/1710C)
EBL soft key.................................................. 3-15
echoes (radar) ..........................................5-27
EBL/VRM key ................... 3-14, 3-15, 3-22, 3-23
echoes (sounder)......................................4-19
Echo averaging............................................. 3-28
radar display .............................................5-27
Echo offset (sounder) ................................... 5-30
Compass display ............................................2-3
Echo stretch.................................................. 3-27
Contrast ........................................................1-10
Echo trails
brilliance (GD-1700C/1710C) ................... 3-25
Controls
display unit..................................................1-2
color (GD-1700C/1710C) ......................... 3-26
remote controller.........................................1-5
gradation (GD-1700C/1710C) .................. 3-25
starting...................................................... 3-25
Course-up mode
plotter..........................................................2-8
time........................................................... 3-24
radar .........................................................3-10
EDIT XT-LMT soft key ............................. 2-4, 2-5
CPA/TCPA alarm...........................................3-42
ENTER knob................................................... 1-4
Cursor
Error messages ............................................ 7-13
display format ...........................................5-25
shifting ......................................................1-15
Cursor pad ....................................................1-15
CURSOR soft key.........................................3-19
ETA calculation ............................................. 2-51
F
Fish alarm
sensitivity.................................................. 5-29
D
setting ....................................................... 4-21
Data boxes
Fish alarm (B/L)
erasing ......................................................1-17
sensitivity.................................................. 5-29
hiding ........................................................1-17
Fish school echo........................................... 4-27
rearranging ...............................................1-17
Fishalarm (B/L) ............................................. 4-22
setup .........................................................5-15
Fix mode (GPS Receiver) ............................ 5-21
showing.....................................................1-17
Formatting memory cards .............................. 6-1
DEPTH INFO soft key...................................5-14
FREQ 50/200 soft key .................................... 4-3
Depth measurement .....................................4-12
FTC (Fast Time Constant) .............................. 3-6
Depth source ..................................................5-2
Function keys
Depth unit .......................................................5-2
function execution .................................... 1-18
Diagnostics
setup (plotter) ............................................. 5-5
ARP test......................................................7-8
setup (radar)............................................. 5-28
display unit test...........................................7-7
setup (sounder) ........................................ 5-34
GPS sensor test .........................................7-7
Fuse replacement........................................... 7-2
keyboard test ............................................7-10
network sounder test ..................................7-8
test menu ....................................................7-6
test pattern..................................................7-9
DISP key .......................................................1-12
Display modes .............................................. 1-11
Display unit test ..............................................7-7
DISPLY MODE soft key ..................................4-2
Downloading data ...........................................6-5
Dual frequency display ...................................4-4
G
GAIN key
radar ........................................................... 3-2
sounder .................................................... 4-11
GENERAL SETUP menu ............................... 5-1
Geodetic datum (GPS Receiver).................. 5-19
Geodetic datum codes ...................................A-9
GPS Receiver setup ..................................... 5-18
GPS sensor test ............................................. 7-7
GPS SETUP menu ....................................... 5-18
E
GPS status display ....................................... 7-11
E. AVG soft key .............................................3-28
Guard alarm
E. STR soft key.............................................3-27
cancelling ................................................. 3-31
EBL reference ...............................................5-26
setting ....................................................... 3-30
Index-2
INDEX
H
Memory
Heading line.................................................. 3-17
clearing..................................................... 7-12
Head-up mode.............................................. 3-10
testing......................................................... 7-6
Highway display.............................................. 2-5
Memory cards
HL OFF soft key............................................ 3-17
error messages .......................................... 6-3
Hot page setup ............................................. 5-16
formatting ................................................... 6-1
Hue (GD-1700C/1710C)
playing back ............................................... 6-4
plotter, radar ............................................. 1-10
saving data to ............................................. 6-2
sounder..................................................... 4-19
Memory I/O test.............................................. 7-6
Menu tree ....................................................... A-1
I
I. REJ. soft key.............................................. 3-18
Messages
memory cards ............................................ 6-3
Icons ............................................................. A-11
plotter alarms ........................................... 2-60
Interference rejection
radar ......................................................... 3-18
sounder..................................................... 4-13
K
Keyboard test ............................................... 7-10
Keying pulse ................................................. 5-31
sounder alarms ........................................ 4-25
MOB mark .................................................... 1-16
Multiple echoes (radar)................................. 3-46
N
Nav data display............................................. 2-6
NAV DATA menu .......................................... 5-24
L
Nav data source ........................................... 5-18
Language........................................................ 5-2
Nav data window ............................................ 2-2
Latitude, longitude display .............................. 5-2
NAV SETUP menu ....................................... 5-17
Lines
Navigation
entering..................................................... 2-25
canceling route navigation ....................... 2-52
erasing all ................................................. 2-28
port, port services..................................... 2-47
erasing by area......................................... 2-27
quick point ................................................ 2-45
erasing individual...................................... 2-27
restarting .................................................. 2-50
type........................................................... 2-26
routes ....................................................... 2-49
LOAD DATA menu .......................................... 6-4
switching waypoints in a route ................. 2-51
Local time ..................................................... 5-18
waypoints ................................................. 2-46
Lost target alarm........................................... 3-43
Navigator setup ................................... 5-17, 5-19
M
NavNet
image source............................................ 1-14
Magnetic variation .......................................... 5-3
receiving data from..................................... 6-9
Maintenance
battery replacement.................................... 7-2
Network sounder test ..................................... 7-8
fuse replacement........................................ 7-2
NEXT INFO soft key............................ 2-59, 4-24
preventive ................................................... 7-1
Noise limiter (sounder) ................................. 4-13
Marker-zoom display ...................................... 4-5
Noise rejection (radar).................................. 3-17
Marks
North marker ................................................ 3-17
color.......................................................... 2-25
North-up mode
entering..................................................... 2-25
plotter ......................................................... 2-7
erasing all ................................................. 2-28
radar ..........................................................3-11
erasing by area......................................... 2-27
O
erasing individual...................................... 2-27
Offset EBL .................................................... 3-22
shape........................................................ 2-25
OFFSET soft key................................. 3-22, 3-23
Index-3
INDEX
P
switching waypoints in route navigation ... 2-51
Picture advance speed .................................4-17
voyage based ........................................... 2-39
PLOTTER SETUP menu ................................5-4
PLOTTR CNTRL soft key .............................1-13
Port, port services
icons .........................................................2-13
navigating to .............................................2-47
Position offset (GPS Receiver) .....................5-20
Position smoothing (GPS Receiver) .............5-19
POWER/BRILL key..................................1-8, 1-9
Presentation mode
plotter..........................................................2-7
radar ...........................................................3-9
S
SART ............................................................ 3-48
Satellite disable (GPS Receiver) .................. 5-20
SAVE DATA menu .......................................... 6-1
SAVE/MOB key ............................................ 1-16
Sensor setup ................................................ 5-30
SENSOR SETUP menu ............................... 5-32
SENSOR SETUP soft key ............................ 5-32
Shadow sectors ............................................ 3-47
Shift
automatic (radar) ...................................... 3-21
Proximity alarm .............................................2-57
manual (radar).......................................... 3-20
Pulselength (radar) .........................................3-8
sounder .................................................... 4-11
R
SHIFT soft key..................................... 3-20, 4-11
Racon............................................................3-50
Sidelobe echoes ........................................... 3-46
RADAR CNTRL soft key...............................1-13
Signal level erasure (sounder) ..................... 4-15
RADAR SETTING menu (radar)...................5-25
SIM SETUP menu ........................................ 1-19
RADAR TX/ST-BY soft key.............................3-2
Simulation display......................................... 1-19
Range
Smoothing echoes (sounder) ....................... 5-31
measurement by cursor (radar) ................3-13
Soft keys ......................................................... 1-3
measurement by range rings (radar)........3-12
Speed alarm ................................................. 2-56
measurement by VRM (radar) ..................3-14
Speed averaging
GPS Receiver GP-310B/320B ................. 5-20
plotter..........................................................2-9
radar ...........................................................3-7
navigator (GPS, Loran C)......................... 5-18
setup (sounder) ........................................5-32
Speed display ................................................. 5-2
unit of measurement...................................5-2
Speed/course smoothing (GPS Receiver
GP-310B) ................................................. 5-19
RANGE key
plotter..........................................................2-9
SPLIT soft key ................................................ 4-8
radar ...........................................................3-7
System configuration ..........................................x
sounder.....................................................4-10
SYSTEM SETUP menu (sounder) ............... 5-30
Remote controller
control description ......................................1-5
testing .......................................................7-10
RESET XTE soft key ...............................2-4, 2-5
RINGS soft key .............................................3-12
Routes
cancelling navigation of ............................2-52
connecting ................................................2-41
entering with cursor ..................................2-38
entering with existing waypoints ...............2-37
erasing ......................................................2-44
following....................................................2-49
inserting waypoint from plotter display .....2-43
inserting waypoint from route list ..............2-42
removing waypoint from ...........................2-44
Index-4
T
TARGET soft key.......................................... 3-24
TD display....................................................... 5-3
TD setup
Decca ....................................................... 5-23
Loran C..................................................... 5-22
TD SETUP menu.......................................... 5-22
Test menu ....................................................... 7-6
Test pattern..................................................... 7-9
Time measurement (sounder) ...................... 4-12
Time notation .................................................. 5-2
TIME soft key................................................ 3-24
TLL data output (radar)................................. 3-29
TLL OUTPUT key ......................................... 3-29
Track
INDEX
color.......................................................... 2-20
W
displaying other targets'............................ 2-19
WAAS ......................................................xii, 5-21
displaying own ship's................................ 2-18
Watchman .................................................... 3-32
erasing all own ship's ............................... 2-24
Water temperature alarm ............................. 4-23
erasing all targets' .................................... 2-24
Water temperature graph ............................. 4-25
erasing own ship's by area ....................... 2-23
Water temperature unit................................... 5-2
erasing own ship's by color ...................... 2-24
Waypoint marker (radar) .............................. 3-33
memory distribution setting ...................... 2-22
Waypoints
plotting interval ......................................... 2-21
changing size ........................................... 2-35
plotting method ......................................... 2-21
color.......................................................... 2-30
plotting of own ship's ................................ 2-19
editing from waypoint list.......................... 2-32
TRACK HALT soft key .................................. 2-19
editing waypoint position .......................... 2-33
TRACK RESUME soft key............................ 2-19
editing with cursor .................................... 2-33
TRAIL COLOR soft key ................................ 3-26
entering at own ship position ................... 2-29
TRAIL ON/OFF soft key................................ 3-25
entering by range and bearing ................. 2-31
TRAIL soft key ............................3-24, 3-25, 3-26
entering with cursor.................................. 2-29
Trip alarm...................................................... 2-58
erasing from the menu ............................. 2-34
Trip distance resetting .................................. 2-60
erasing from waypoint list......................... 2-34
Troubleshooting .............................................. 7-3
erasing with cursor ................................... 2-34
plotter.......................................................... 7-3
loading from Yeoman ................................. 6-8
radar ........................................................... 7-3
navigating to............................................. 2-46
sounder....................................................... 7-5
searching.................................................. 2-36
True motion mode......................................... 3-11
shape........................................................ 2-30
Tuning ............................................................. 3-2
switching in route navigation .................... 2-51
TVG .............................................................. 5-31
White marker ................................................ 4-16
Tx sector (radar) ........................................... 5-26
World time chart ........................................... A-10
WPT MK soft key.......................................... 3-33
U
Uploading data................................................ 6-5
X
XTE (cross track error) alarm....................... 2-56
V
Vector (ARP)................................................. 3-39
XTE monitor ............................................ 2-4, 2-5
Virtual image................................................. 3-47
Y
VRM (Variable Range Marker)
Yeoman .......................................................... 6-8
radar ......................................................... 3-14
sounder..................................................... 4-12
VRM soft key .......................................3-15, 3-16
Z
Zero line ....................................................... 4-26
Zoom ............................................................ 3-19
ZOOM/D.BOX soft key ................................. 3-19
Index-5
">